Home
        Managing Content with ANCILE uPerform
         Contents
1.                                   eessssuuu  211  Introduction to Author Fermplatess stes gs pi estan tana sius bacon isle atis petites 212  Managing Author Templdles  i secco o eet rr tru Ie ROM ASPEN VAUe Sal Que TRU US Rp REY ONU Y eR RUP NS ETRA ge RE 214  Create and Open a New Author Template                      esses eene nennen enne 2 4  Specifying New Template Settings  General csc  ose tesi cenae tio eus aeuo echten eene es eee Pea duee as een 216  Specifying New Template Settings  Properties score Ore oa oae Rhe Eod e RE NUT Sd e eue 224  Specifying New Template Settings  Phrases                   esseeeseesseeeeeeeeeee enne enne 228  Specifying New Template Settings  Publications                         eee 230  Specifying New Template Settings  Styles costos   ste Go etg SPD die tote ane fede dungen due ies 266  Specifying New Template Settings  Blocks                        sees 273  Specifying New Template Settings  Sections                    eese eene 2776  Export and Import an Author  Template  4    ait ti ore eter eter ttn eee 280  Delete an Author Templaten n ime en inde ode detta a Ea a Ea dpesta D AES 283       Table of Contents       Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files                285  Introduction to Custom Skin Management    reco seqedgaedoneavadseaededs Ure Roa etur de dpes tese see e ted 286  Creatine SEIS aa ecient cakes teria qune eia Mo cqdtan detti det tian Seas Rue OAM QU  287  Managmg Custom Skins   ecce e xen nn uae SEN 
2.                            eese 93   Working with Translated Content    uoo ai Aah i Onion eit eee 93   Viewing Translated COnDteHE  i e du ee ee teda dut m oa tie utis 96   Receiving Notifications About Docuttients         eiat esencia eoe atu e edge ste cedet ient ridus 98   Working with Related Content  nite te e et t nete to er Are Re dose ELE Pe ERU i e sU iR IS 98    Ust  e Vetrstoh History n esie onc eee bec Ieen potete cuore cc e eden EEA IEE 101  Retention Perio  m 103  Transaction Change Notifications    sse cese taseactessaseezasecoadeasponacdeteaceeuassacuatesdenadsassavcanateeess 105  Manageme the  Recycle BI  eco t ac evi n eo a a oered sn 108   Chapter 6  Working With the Website                                                   111  Introduction to  the Website M M mc 112  Building the Website via Context Assignment                   eese nennen nen 113   Using Website Folders for Context Assignment                  sese enne 113  Assigning a Website Context to Document Library Content                          eese 115  Building the Website via Dynamic Website Folders                           eee 119  Working with Dynamic Website Folders              eu eade pedet ad eni eiit deese 119  Browsme the Websitesine a a eroe it oda e dena en tedesca ded oq ee 126  Publishing Content for Display on the Website                     eeeseeeeeeeeeeenen nen 127  Publishing  ConfreurduoD s c eet oi ccd oh otio Get des uae bad bonis dieti utis 127  subser bine to Publish E
3.                       eee 333  Preparing to Execute the Migration cues oderat nra a ae abd tesa oae de Cuin cease oie 334   Migration Prerequisites and Recommendations                   eene 334   Activities During Web Architect Processing      5er itae ee ape e ety eet es Ru LU de ous 335   Activities During Glossary Processing                 ssecseccesscesseneeceeseecenteeceneedcerseccenseesonteccenseces 335   Activities During Document Check In Processing        s eessesesesseseesrssreeressesererrersereresreeseeseese 336   Activities During Template Processi    ace e ode ete otuae ta edges taces tee ue pae uiis 337   Activities During Document Transformation Processing                     esee 337  Executing a Migration RUIN oe ennn aee hs tad Lat bas dest de TESA 339  Reviewing the Migration Results   5t e Dt pple M eqoqele pac D plipdaur tutt eiu pat odds 352   Using the Info Pak Properties Specified in the uPerform Project                            ssssss 353  Executme the Transformialloh sao oet cesi aie Toute toan Legit lee ostii ades eS 355  Reviewing and Editing Transformed Documents and Simulations                              sssss 360   Reviewing and Editing Transformations                    eese nennen nnne 360   Editing Transformed Into Pak Documents       ie erede ptio edo oa Gade edes 361   Glossary OF Terms    eee E E esp eta cece naaar EERE 363   o cR 367       Chapter 1  Introduction    ANCILE uPerform provides authors and administrators with a robust  
4.           eee 30  Manually Creating and Updating User Accounts                     eese enne 3l  Creating and Managing Users Via User Information Source                    sse 37  Working with User Information Sources         eeseessseesesseessesressessresresstesresrersteseesereseesreseresreses 38  Working With User Information Source Filters                        eese 45  Managing uPerform Roles    rad der dicet t eve un ure uide eie deti a abor darte ee 52  Creating and Updating Groups          sesessseesssessessersseeesssetsstesseesseessseessstesseesstesseeesseessresseesseesseet 55       Table of Contents       Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library                                     63  Introduction to the Document Library 5  nee depende ta det leg da pte tede qut tte ed 64  ccu AIMaulIm C                                                  66  Working WIGHT CMP IAL MN rm 69  Specifying Project Settings 5 2 4 5 coho dete Bei ah oo ee 12  Populating the Document Library 2  lt coscnee daca Sica Ge eo ee cae 76   Import a Document Library Structure   cun ioc ete o ntu eique itte T71  Browsing the Document Library        eesessesseseeeseessesresseseresresstssresresstestestessteseeserssteseserestesseserssees 79  Managing the Document Library eue di eid 83   Mlanaping PoldersSaoa cece acct Bl aue sa Baha Ba E crisi ue Bae deed 83   Managing Documents 5    ue ciet e RU n SN Ene PLURES ea RECS in toe gocads ER Rae Ve Urea va rei 84  Managing Translations and Related Content 
5.         202 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports       3  Click Save Report As in the left menu     Save Report Copy of Document Tracking Report As    This vizard vill allow you to create a custom report which can be run against this uPerform server  Please enter a name and description for this report   Report Name  Copy of Document Tracking Report  Description  Displays a detailed report of the documents assigned to a  project     Template  None    Search all templates    4  Complete the following fields     Report Name Enter a unique name for the report   Enter an optional description for the report     Template Optionally  select the template associated with the  report from the drop down list  This gives you the  ability to create filters using template properties     Search all templates Select this option to determine if you want to search    properties for all templates     Deselect this option to specify that you want the  search performed only on the template selected in  the Template drop down list        5  Click Next     Save Report Copy of Document Tracking Report As    Please select the columns you want in the report     Available Columns    Selected Columns  Al Project  Dangle       name a  GUID Document Type  Logical Object Identifier  LOID  File Name  File Name Owner  File Size       workflow Status      Document Type Version Name  URL    Version Number    Language Modified Date   Transaction Code Document Library Context    Translation Enabled
6.         Add Multiple Languages Enable multi language support to set a name and  description of the folder for any of the supported  languages  This language specific name and  description will display based on the language  preference set in the user s account     Click Add Multiple Languages     Select a default language from the drop down list    This language will be displayed if the user s  language is not available      Click Enable        Q From this screen you can also disable multiple language support     7  Click Save     Deleting a Folder  1  Click   393  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library   4  Select the desired folder     5  Click Delete Folder on the left menu     A Deleting a folder will move both the folder and its contents to the recycle bin  For  detailed information on managing the recycle bin  refer to Managing the Recycle Bin   on page 108      6  Click OK at the confirmation prompt     Managing Documents    The server workspace provides access to several document functions  adding a managed  document  adding a web document  updating document properties  changing the document owner   and deleting a document     A ANCILE uPerform documents are added to the server via the editor workspace  You  cannot add uPerform documents to the server via the server workspace        84 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       A managed document can be a non uPerform non Info Pak f
7.         C System Profile Values    Profile Option Name Site  Applications Help Web Agent       Application    Responsibility          8  Paste the author setting URL into the Applications Web Help Agent profile setting User  column for the author in Oracle E Business     Q For more information on setting system profile values  refer to the Oracle E Business    documentation     9  Save the author settings        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     303    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Modifying Oracle E Business End User Accounts for Use with Context Sensitive    Help    9    You must modify all existing user accounts to enable context sensitive help  An Oracle  E Business administrator creates end user accounts based on the needs of the company   While there are several options for defining system profile values for existing users   this procedure demonstrates defining a system profile value for an individual user     1  Log into Oracle E Business as a system administrator     2  Define system profile values for the user     Q Refer to the Oracle E Businessdocumentation for information about the System Profile  Values Site  Application  Responsibility  and User  and to choose which system  profile value is most appropriate for your end user community        Fire Syztom Po  l gt   aluoc    Display  Site  Application  Besponsibility  Server  B   Organization  V User CHAD        V Profiles with No Values    Profile Applications Help Web Agent    Find Clear          3  In uPerfo
8.        General Properties Phrases Publications  Styles  Blocks Sections  Ready    5  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Select or deselect one or more checkboxes in the  Enabled column        Select Check All     6  Select Manage All Styles from the task pane   7  Click on the drop down list below Action Note Style     8  Select one of the following styles from the task pane     Field   Description   Default Course Content Title  The style to be used for the text displayed in the  Text content title area of a course    Default Course Drag Drop The style to be used for the text displayed for drag  Text and drop in a course     Default Course Page Title The style to be used for the text displayed as the   Text page title in a course    Default Course Popup Text  The style to be used for the text displayed as a  popup in a course           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  267    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field   Description   Default Course Questions The style to be used for the text displayed as  Text assessment questions in a course    Default Course Text The style to be used for the course text     Default Course Title Text The style to be used for the text displayed as the  course title     displays at the top of a document     Example Phrase The style to be used for the example phrase text   Generic Table Text The style to be used for generic table text     Guided Help User Interface   The style to be used for the text displayed in a  guided hel
9.       Introduction to the Document Library    Each uPerform server contains one or more projects  These projects contain a logical collection of  content called the document library  uPerform uses the document library to provide access to  content for your authors  The website structure associated with each project provides end users  with access to content on the website  For information on creating a website hierarchy  refer to  Working With the Website  on page 111      Administrator functions in the document library include     M       Oo   a   a   n   a    l    Create projects  folders and subfolders  Create a workflow   Add  assign  and update templates  Relate documents   Move content   Assign group filters   Set default translations   Import a document library structure    Add custom template reports to managed and web documents    Author functions in the document library include     g       ES          0 D    Add managed and web documents   Add a web document   Add a message to a discussion   View user discussion comments   View document properties  including version history  View usage statistics for a document    Participate in a workflow       64    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       C  Create an ad hoc workflow       O Assign a website context to a folder and content       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  65    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Creating the Project    The uPerform server can contain one or more 
10.       cat          a    e  tina    esk   republika   dansk  D                   Deutsch  Deutschland   FAAnwika  AAS   English  United Kingdom  Y                                     6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                   1      Export Name Enter a name to describe the exported content   Example  My Export    Source Language Select the source language for your terms and  definitions from the drop down list    Target Languages Select the language s  you want to export and  translate into or update     7  Click Save        8  Click View Details to download the file TranslationExport   date time  txt     Viewing and Deleting Exported Glossaries and Translations  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area     4  Click Export on the left menu     LJ Glossary Export Actions    Export Name Type Date Started Status    ExportTranslations Translations 9 15 08 10 47 AM                ANCILE Solutions  Inc  195    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       5  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    View the exported glossary or Click Details   translation details    Delete an exported glossary or Click Delete    translation Q You can only delete an exported  glossary or translation once the  export process is complete           196 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports    To track your pr
11.      22 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       Administration Select this option to maintain system configuration settings  configure  publishing and glossary settings  customize the website  and maintain  users  roles  and groups     For more information on system configuration settings and website  maintenance  refer to the ANCILE uPerform Administration manual     For more information on server publishing  refer to Publishing Content  from the Server  on page 129      For more information on users and groups  refer to Managing Users   Roles  and Groups  on page 29      Glossary Select this option to view the glossary   For more information  refer to Working with the Glossary  on page  165     Workflow Select this option to display links for creating and managing workflows   For more information  refer to Using Workflow  on page 143     Recycle Bin Select this option to manage the recycle bin of deleted content  There is  one Recycle Bin per project   For more information  refer to Managing the Recycle Bin  on page 108     Reports Select this option to generate document tracking  workflow  workflow  status  and custom reports   For more information  refer to Using Reports  on page 197      Help Select this option to view or configure help documents available for  uPerform   For more information  refer to Accessing Help for the Server  on page  15     About Select this option to view version details and third party information on  the uPerf
12.      3  Click Bulk Style Change from the task pane     D    ewe   es  1    i  LI  Sereni Pro Sections Randy    fies Pei Pub       B    4  Select a style from the list   5  Click Load Style to view the current style settings for the item selected     6  Using the Ctrl or Shift key  select one or more styles for which you want to apply a bulk  change     7  Complete the following fields     Field  Description  Select the checkbox next to Font to specify a font     Font Color Select the checkbox next to Font Color to specify a  font color    Select the checkbox next to Size to specify a font  size     Bold Select the checkbox next to Bold  and select Yes or  No to specify a bold font    Underline Select the checkbox next to Underline  and select  Yes or No to specify an underline font    Italic Select the checkbox next to Italic  and select Yes or  No to specify an italic font    Strikethrough Select the checkbox next to Strikethrough  and  select Yes or No to specify a strikethrough font     8  Click Apply        9  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        272    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Specifying New Template Settings  Blocks    Specifying Blocks  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Blocks on the status bar                         Manage All Blocks    Default Recorder Step                                          Step   Name Type Configuration Information   Activity Freetext Course Footer   ASAP BPP Freetex
13.      5  Click Assign Content     Assign Contents to Payroll       BI Document Library  Expand Al    SB human Resources                         Current Contents    6  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To  Expand all items in the tree view Click Expand All        Collapse all items in the tree view Click Collapse All     7  Click   to the left of the folder name to navigate to the desired content     8  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add one or more documents Select the checkbox to the left of one or more  documents        Add one or more folders Select the checkbox next to one or more folders     Click Save      d       118 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Building the Website via Dynamic Website Folders    The dynamic website folder functionality automatically populates your website using template  properties stored within the content  By planning your hierarchy  and assigning values to stored  properties within your template  you can automatically build and manage a multi dimensional  website  For more information on properties  refer to Specifying New Template Settings   Properties  on page 224      Dynamic website folders are updated when you add or remove documents and then republish     Document types include uPerform documents  as well as managed and web documents  You can    also alter the properties specified within a dynamic website folder to add or remove content from  the folder   
14.      Chapter 11  Using Author Templates          Delete an Author Template    A Create a backup of the template file prior to deleting the template  Any existing  documents created with the deleted template cannot be opened after the template is  deleted     Deleting an Author Template  1  Select FILE  gt  MANAGE LOCAL TEMPLATES   2  Select the template you want to delete   3  Click Remove     4  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  283    Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and  Modifying CSS Files    ANCILE uPerform allows you to manage custom skins for courses   simulations  and guided help publications  You can deploy custom  skins with the uPerform client or server to allow multiple authors the  ability to share and use the custom skins  uPerform allows you to  modify CSS files to incorporate your corporate standards and  preferences        285    Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files          Introduction to Custom Skin Management    Custom skin management simplifies the deployment of custom skins to multiple authors from the  uPerform client and server  Custom skins associated with courses  simulations  and guided help  can be imported from a local computer to uPerform  exported from uPerform to a local computer   and checked in to the server     Only System and Project Administrators can check in custom skins        286 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files          Creating Skins    Creating Skins   If you do n
15.     3  Selected Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  261    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Mobile Device Publication Settings from the drop down list     File Edit View Format Tools Help Debug  GPM O DAE  COO 4 FHR N2   2552959e  5  9  95m in  nam            Quick Reference  Flow   Quick Reference  Step   Simulation  Student Guide  Test Document  Test Script  Work Instruction   Default Publication Settings   Document  Simulation                   LARA       s                          Un       M      eneral Properties Phrases  Publications  Styles Blocks Sections  Ready    Connected          5  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a new operating Click Add     system browser configuration   Enter an operating system in the Operating System  field     Enter the Browser type in the Browser field   Click OK     Modify an existing operating   Select an operating system browser combination   system browser configuration   Select Modify     Change operating system browser setting as desired   Click OK     Delete an existing operating   Select an operating system browser combination   system browser configuration   Select Delete     Click Yes        Q The Operating System and Browser pairs are detected during launch  At this time   there are no custom settings for each mobile device     6  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        262 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Aut
16.     Chapier 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Field  Description          Security Connection    Field Mapping    Enable Automatic Synchronization    Send Account Created Notifications    10  Click OK        Select the Simple or Anonymous radio button     If you choose simple  enter the user name and  password of the user to use to connect to the  directory server     User ID  Enter the property name from the  directory server     Unique Identifier  Enter the property name  from the directory server     Email Address  Enter the property name from  the directory server     First Name  Enter the property name from the  directory server     Last Name  Enter the property name from the  directory server     This option allows you to automatically  synchronize filters created for this user source   This will allow you to quickly synchronize from  a specific user source when a new file is  uploaded  file is updated on the web  changes are  made to the directory server  or changes are  made to the field mapping     It is recommended that you leave this option  disabled until you are ready to synchronize user  accounts     For more information on automatic  synchronization  refer to  Schedule Automated  Tasks  in the companion manual ANCILE  uPerform Administration     This option enables the uPerform server to send  an email to a user the first time the account is  synchronized     Q ANCILE recommends enabling this  option when using XML files as the  user source to ensure y
17.     Context sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from ANCILE uPerform via a  direct link in the SAP CRM Web Client application     Configuring SAP CRM Web Client to Send a Help Request to the uPerform Server    Q The SAP system administrator must configure SAP CRM Web Client to send help  requests to the uPerform server  This configuration is specified by adding variants to  the PlainHtmlHttp tab of the SR13 transaction code     1  Log into SAP CRM via the SAP GUI     2  Enter the transaction code SR13     F Table View Edit Goto Selection Criteria Utilities M  System Help   7  a a2Hieee 230g  bianssigJag oem  Change View  Administration  Display of the SAP Library         New Entries f  ER  e Ex              00m                                                                       variant Platform      Area Server Na   Langua   Default  m               gt                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ANCILE Solutions  Inc  315    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       3  On the DynamicHelp tab  delete any existing entries   4  Click B     5  Select the PlainHtmlHttp tab                    Table View Edi
18.     Password  Enter the password for the user     Password Confirmation  Confirm the  password     User ID  Enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user ID     Unique Identifier  Enter the XPath string from  the user element in the file to the unique  identifier  This allows uPerform to update the  user if it is changed in the directory server or file  source     Email Address  Enter the XPath string from the  user element in the file to the email address        40    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapier 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Field Description               First Name  Enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user s first name   Last Name  Enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user s last name     Enable Automatic Synchronization This option allows you to automatically  synchronize filters created for this user source   This will allow you to quickly synchronize from  a specific user source when a new file is  uploaded  file is updated on the web  changes are  made to the directory server  or changes are    made to the field mapping     It is recommended that you leave this option  disabled until you are ready to synchronize user  accounts     For more information on automatic  synchronization  refer to  Schedule Automated  Tasks  in the companion manual ANCILE  uPerform Administration     Send Account Created Notifications This option enables the uPerform server to send  an email to
19.     Q This will open the binder for uPerform and Info Pak documents     Click Assign Website Context on the left menu to display the website context     Assign Website Context to HR Timesheets                                           Removing a Context from Content or a Document Library Folder    1     2     Click  amp sise  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Document Library     Navigate to the document or folder from which the context should be removed  and click on  the document or folder name     Click Assign Website Context on the left menu to display the first level of website folders  you have created     Click   to the left of the folder name to navigate to the desired folder s      Assign Website Context to HR Timesheets            v  e Website  Expand Al  v  89 Benefits   8  new Hires   v  9 Payroll    Current Contexts                                     Website    Benefits  Website  gt  Payroll    Website       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  117    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       7  Deselect the checkbox to the left of one or more folders to remove contexts in the website  folder s      8  Click Save     9  Repeat Step 4 through Step 8 to remove additional context links from documents or folders in  the document library     Assigning Content to a Website Folder  1  Click sss  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Website   4  Navigate to the website folder for which you want to assign content
20.    3  Click Publish   4  Refresh the SRM screen displayed in the web browser   Q You may need to clear your browser s cache or Temporary Internet Files   5  Inthe desired BSP application screen  select the Help link to open a new window that    displays the ID for the screen     Including the SRM Screen ID in Documents    ANCILE uPerform allows the author to populate properties within the document  uPerform  leverage these properties when building website navigation and quick launch pages  while the  uPerform server uses these properties to produce search results     uPerform provides a Properties window for populating the Transaction Code s  property within  the document  To map a uPerform document to a SRM screen via the Properties tab     1     2     3     Ensure that the Transaction Code s  built in property is marked as visible in the uPerform  template  By default  the display of all built in properties is disabled in the template     Open the desired uPerform document associated with the template     Select FILE    PROPERTIES           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  313    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       4     5     Click PROPERTIES on the left pane   Select the Transaction Code s  field     Enter the iView portal page ID or the screen ID in the Transaction Code s  field  For multiple  pages or IDs  separate each with a comma     Click OK     Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save your uPerform document     Viewing Help Content for an SRM Screen    If the SHOW_ID property is s
21.    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       9  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Template Update    49 Migration    Step 4  Info Pak Configuration Information  Specify the Info Pak configuration files to be used for document transformation     Template Profile     Project Settings        10  Click Browse  and locate the Info Pak profile you want to use to update the template   11  Click Next     12  Complete the following     Field  Description          Automatically Generate Exercise Select this option to automatically update the exercise  Section section in the uPerform document after transformation     Transform Procedure Section Select this option to transform the procedure section from  your Info Pak document into a uPerform document     This option determines if the procedure section in  the new uPerform document should be populated   A based on the Info Pak simulation or document  If  this option is disabled  new uPerform documents  will not contain any content in the procedure  section     Transform Procedure from Select this option to transform the procedure section from  Simulation if available your Info Pak simulation     Transform Procedure Section must be enabled  to use this option     To transform an Info Pak procedure section from   A the simulation  the Info Pak simulation must be in  the same directory as the parent document and  the file name must be the same  Simulations  stored in other directories will not be transformed  with the parent docum
22.    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content       6  Click Author Discussion or Website Discussion     7  Select one of the following options to subscribe to the document     If You Want To    Add to your favorites located on the  server home page     Add yourself to the recipient list to  receive copies of messages posted to  the discussion    Subscribe to the discussion to receive a  notification when messages are posted       Click Add To My Favorites      To remove from your favorites  click My  Favorites on the Home page and then click  Delete      Click Add Me To Discussion  Then click Add  Me To Discussion again      To remove yourself from the discussion  click  Remove Me From Discussion on the left menu   Then  click Remove Me From Discussion  again      Click Subscribe on the left menu     Specify your desired personal page notification  options     Click OK      To unsubscribe from the discussion  click  Unsubscribe on the left menu  Then  click OK         ANCILE Solutions  Inc     161    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Managing Discussions    Administrators can delete messages within a discussion thread     Deleting a Message in a Discussion    1  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Scroll down to the Author Discussion or Website Discussion area of the window   3  Click Author Discussion or Website Discussion     4  Click Remov
23.    Selected Columns     Description  4 a    GUID  Logical Object Identifier  LOID   File Name  File Size         Document Type  URL    Language  Transaction Code  Translation Enabled  Deleted    Context URL   Document Library Context   Website Contexts   Project   Locked   Locker        Previous      next    E  cance       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  205    Chapter 10  Using Reports       5  Selecta field from the Available Columns listbox     6  Click the right arrow to move the field into the Selected Columns list box   Q If you want to generate a report for usage statistics  select Hit Count  Hit Count Reset  On  and or Hit Count Reset By     Custom template properties are noted with an asterisk  For example  Transaction  Code s      7  Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to add additional fields to the report   8  Optionally  click the left arrow to remove fields from the Selected Columns list   9  Click the up and down arrows to reorder fields in the Selected Columns list     10  Click Next     New Report  Please create the filter for this report  Each filter condition added will narrow the scope of this report   Add Filter Condition    Field Name Condition     Variable    Document Content or Title     Contains Any v     Fixed       Current Filter    Field Name Condition Value             11  Select a field name from the Field Name drop down list     12  Select a condition from the following list     Field  Description      Contains Any Contains any keyword  Reports do not handle  comma del
24.   127  connection   299  Oracle   299  SAP CRM 2007   298  315  content   26  deleting   89  subscribing   26  context assignment   113  adding   116  assigning   115  removing   117  viewing   117  context sensitive help  Oracle   299  302  304  325  SAP CRM 2007   298  315  Siebel 8   318  conventions   4  conversion types   127       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     367    Index       Copying   202  Reports   202  creating   31  author template   214  custom report    205  discussions   158  dynamic website folder   119  groups    55  project   66  related content   99  tell others   163  user information source    37  38  41  45   47  users   31  workflow   145  Custom Reports   201  205  207  209  Create   205  Delete   209  Edit   207  customizing   141  website   141  D  default publication settings   235  237  240   242  243  253  255  257  259  260  definition   167  168  adding   173  adding to an existing term   174  assigning context   174  deleting   178  editing   176  entering   168  formatting   177  suggesting   167  updating   167  deleting   35  content    89  custom report    209  definition   178  discussion   162  dynamic website folder   125  folders   84  group filter   61  project   74  template from local computer   283  term   177  user account    35    website folder   115  125  workflow   152  disabling   97  LMS   138  rich text in glossary   171  translated content   97  discussions   156  157  158  159  160  162  creating   158  deleting   162  managi
25.   130  view   130  131  hit count   64  81  90  I  imported glossary   193    delete    195  view   193  Info Pak   353  360  properties in uPerform   353  transformed document   360  uploading data into uPerform   339  Info Pak properties in uPerform   353  installing    333  managing content    8  L  language specific font   266  left menu    21  collapsing   24  expanding   24  options   22  list  my alerts   26  my favorites   26  my projects   25  my review    25  LMS   135  adding   135  assigning project   137  disabling   138  enabling   138  LMS properties   136  unassigning project   138  LMS settings   242  257  M  manage    29  83  93  108  managed documents   85  adding   85  enabling conversion types for managed  documents   127  managing    13  discussions   162  document library   83  documents   84  folders   83  roles   52  suggestions   179  synonyms   181  your account    13  Migration Wizard   333  installing    333  migrating Info Pak documents   347       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     369    Index       migration run   339  executing   339  overview   330  reviewing results    352  uninstalling   333  modifying    53  136  end user   304  LMS properties   136  related content   99  roles   30  52  53  54  moving    91  documents    91  my alerts   26  my favorites   26  my projects   25  my review    25  my review list   149  N  navigating   79  126  via document context   79  via website context   126  notifications   98  147  workflow   147  0  options   
26.   200 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports       Exporting Reports    1  Click Reports in the left menu     2  Choose from one of the following options     If You Want To    Export an assessment performance Click Assessment Performance Report  and go  reports  to Step 5     Export a document tracking report Click Document Tracking Report     Export a published content report Click Published Content Report   Export a workflow status report Click Workflow Status Report   Export a custom report Click on the name of the custom report      B       Report   Document Tracking Report  Report Properties    Owner  Administrator Administrator    Last Modified  3 21 08 5 24 PM    Selected Project  Name  Document Type  File Name  Ovmer  Workflow Status  Version Name  Version Number  Modified  Columns  Date  Document Library Context  Website Contexts  Filter  Project Is  Project     3  Review the following fields     Field  Description               Owner The user who generated the report  Click on this link  to obtain information about the user     Last Modified  If applicable  the date of the last document  modification     Selected Columns The columns specified for report generation   Limitations for what the report will return        4  Click View Report in the left menu     View Document Tracking Report    Generating reports can take a significant amount of time and can tax the system  The amount of time it takes to generate a  report is based on the number of documents
27.   A dynamic website folder is identified by a     to the left of the folder name in the author view   Optionally  you can populate your website via context assignment  For more information  refer to  Building the Website via Context Assignment  on page 113      Working with Dynamic Website Folders    Creating a Dynamic Website Folder  1  Click siss in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Website   4  Navigate to the destination folder for the dynamic website folder     5  Click Add Dynamic Website Folder     Create a New Dynamic Website Folder    This wizard allows you to create a dynamic website folder that searches for documents based on specified filter conditions       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  119    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       6  Complete the following fields     Description    Enter a name for the dynamic website folder   Enter amplifying information about the folder     7  Perform one of the following options     i You Want To  Add multiple languages Go to Step 8        Create the dynamic website folder with   Go to Step 12   one language enabled    8  Click Add Multiple Languages     Create a New Dynamic Website Folder       This wizard allows you to create a dynamic website folder that searches for documents based on specified filter conditions      Enabling multi language support allows authors to set a name and description for any of the supported languages  This language specific  name and description will display bas
28.   Browsing the Document Library    All uPerform content has an associated binder and a cover page  The uPerform binder contains  multiple translations  if available  of a uPerform document  In the binder  the administrator can  set default translations  assign group filters  and edit related documents  The actual content is filed  in the Translations area of the binder     The content hyperlinks within the Translations area will take you to the cover page that provides  helpful information on document properties and status  From the cover page  the author can create  a Workflow  create and participate in discussions  and access versions          Assign Website Context     Sales Timesheet  uPerform Binder   Managed Document Binder     Properties  Last Modified      6 29 11 11 43 AM    Last Modified By  Rebecca Jenshak    Translations    English  United States   en US   Sales Timesheet  uPerform Binder   Default     Group Assignments    No group filters applied    Document Library Context    uPerform 4 40 0 13  gt  Documen tation Test  gt  Document Library  gt  Sales Timesheet  uPerform Binder   gt  Sales Timesheet  uPerform Binder   Related Documents    No related document selected       Via standard hyperlink navigation  you can browse the document library and view the storage  hierarchy and content objects     Q You can also access the document library via the TOOLS    LIBRARY REPOSITORY  menu in the uPerform editor     Navigating via the Document Library Context    A Docume
29.   Deleted   Context Name   Context OID    Context URL   Document Library Context   Website Contexts   Project   Locked   Locker          Previous  next    cancel    6  Select a column from the Available Columns listbox     Q Custom template properties are noted with an asterisk         7  Click the right arrow to move the field into the Selected Columns list box     8  Optionally  click the left arrow to remove a field from the Selected Columns list        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  203    Chapter 10  Using Reports       9  Click the up and down arrows to reorder items in the Selected Columns list   10  Repeat Steps 6 through 9 to add additional fields to the report     11  Click Next     Save Report Copy of Document Tracking Report As  Please create the filter for this report  Each filter condition added will narrow the scope of this report   Add Filter Condition    Field Name Condition    Variable    Document Content or Title     Contains Any v     Fixed  Current Filter    Field Name Condition Value    Project Is  Project   t Delete    12  Select a field name from the Field Name drop down list     13  Select a condition from the following list     Contains Any Contains any keyword     Contains All Contains all of the keywords     Does not contain Does not contain any of the keywords        14  Choose from the following options     if You Want To    Specify the field name as a variable Select the Variable radio button   object when generating reports    Specify the field name as
30.   INTEGRATION CREDENTIALS in the uPerform server workspace     2  Click Add Credential     3  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                          Credential ID This is a unique user ID  This user ID cannot be  synchronized nor can this ID be used to log into the    system as a user     Must adhere to password strength requirements   Password Confirmation Must match password     4  Click Save        Editing Integration Credentials    1  Click ADMINISTRATION    SERVER ADMINISTRATION    INTEGRATION SETTINGS     INTEGRATION CREDENTIALS in the uPerform server workspace     2  Select the credential to be changed   3  Click Edit Credential     4  Complete the following fields     Field Description                  Credential ID This is a unique user ID  This user ID cannot be  synchronized nor can this ID be used to log into    the system as a user     Password Must adhere to password strength requirements   Password Confirmation Must match password        5  Click Save     Deleting Integration Credentials    1  Click ADMINISTRATION    SERVER ADMINISTRATION    INTEGRATION SETTINGS     INTEGRATION CREDENTIALS in the uPerform server workspace     2  Select the credential to be changed        106 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       3  Click Delete Credential     4  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  107    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Managing the Recycle Bin    The uPerform recycle bin acts
31.   Introduction to Incorporating Info Pak Content    ANCILE uPerform includes a tool  the Migration Wizard  which allows you to migrate your Info  Pak project to uPerform  The Migration Wizard also allows you to link from your uPerform  website to content created and published by Info Pak  Finally  the Migration Wizard includes  functionality to allow you to transform Info Pak documents and simulations to uPerform    documents     A Your Info Pak   Web Architect and Info Pak   Glossary database information will be  migrated to uPerform when you use the Migration Wizard  You can choose to have  your Info Pak documents remain outside of uPerform and edit and publish these  documents using Info Pak  Alternately  you can transform your Info Pak documents to  uPerform documents that can be edited and published using uPerform     The Migration Wizard performs four major functions     o    Migrates the Info Pak   Web Architect database content to uPerform  creating your  document library in uPerform  The Migration Wizard creates placeholders to check in  the Info Pak documents  It also creates your website structure to match the website  generated by Info Pak     Migrates the Info Pak   Glossary database content to uPerform  populating your  current terms and definitions in uPerform  Authors can then enter all new terms and  definitions into uPerform for use in the uPerform content  Any terms and definitions  that must also go into the Info Pak   Glossary for use in Info Pak document
32.   Start the SAP Reference IMG using the transaction code SPRO     Q For more information on the SPRO transaction code  refer to SAP note 1038204     9  Click Manage Worklist   10  Click SAP Reference IMG     11  Select KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT    SETTINGS IN THE APPLICATION SYSTEM     SEQUENCE OF ENHANCEMENTS IN CUSTOMER NAME SPACES     12  Double click on Sequence of Enhancements in customer Namespace   13  Select Execute     14  Restart the SAP CRM Web Application Server        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  317    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Context Sensitive Help for Siebel 8    Context sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from the uPerform server via a  direct link in Siebel 8     Obtaining the Siebel Custom Menu eScripts    Download the Siebel Custom Menu eScripts from the ANCILE Product Support Center   https   ancile parature com   The following scripts were authored by ANCILE for use by  uPerform customers only  These scripts contain JavaScript code that redirects Siebel s existing  Help link to a help page created with uPerform     O uPerform Service PreCanInvokeMethod Server txt          uPerform ServicePreInvokeMethod Browser txt    Creating a Custom Menu In Siebel 8    A ANCILE recommends creating a custom menu in the test environment and migrating  the changes to the production environment after the changes have been compiled and  tested    Q 
33.   V  Export Undefined Terms                 v  Export Unused Terms       Source Context     E  cy M icollaboration Project  Oo u Acme ERP Project    Selected Context    No context has been selected     soe  cne    6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                    Export Name Enter a name to describe the exported content   Example  My Export   Source Language Select the source language for your terms and  definitions from the drop down list     Export Default Language Select the Export Default Language checkbox to    export the default language for the Glossary if the  source language does not exist     Export Undefined Terms Select the Export Undefined Terms checkbox to  export undefined terms    Export Unused Terms Select the Export Unused Terms to export unused  terms     7  Select the context to export definitions from in the Source Contents area        8  Click Save     9  Click View Details to download the file GlossaryExport   date time   txt     Exporting Translations  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area     3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area        194 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       4  Click Export on the left menu     5  Click Export Translations on the left menu     Export Translations    Export Name        Source Language    English  United States  v          Target Languages  Select All            
34.   Web Architect  Glossary  are installed on this computer and the dala is  set up properly for migration     Content and Parent locations are accessible from the uPerform server  A uPerform account is available   A uPerform client template is available for the transformation process     Interface Language  About    Close       2  Review the prerequisites and  optionally  specify the interface language        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  355    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       3  Click Next        Migration Wizard      J Migration    Step 1  Migration Actions  Specify the migration action you want to complete        Migrate Info Pak content into a uPerform project     Batch check in Info Pak documents     Update a uPerform template for transforming Info Pak documents       Transform Info Pak documents to uPerform documents     pm TER       4  Select the Transform Info Pak documents to uPerform documents radio button     5  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration       Migration       Step 3  Connect to uPerform Server  Specify a connection with the uPerform server    uPerform server location   hittps          uPerform  Username  Password    SSL Configuration             Trust invalid SSL certificates                Use Proxy Authentication       Usemame      Password   juna Test Connection             6  Complete the following information     Field     Description   uPerform server location Enter the URL of your uPerform server   Username Enter the username fo
35.   You can click on this hyperlinked number to review  the list of terms processed     Status Lists the success or failure of the globalization for  the document    Reason Lists the reason the globalization task was initiated   for example  Document Checked In      6  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the history list        7  Optionally  click View Different Date on the left menu to select an alternate globalization    history date to review        186    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Subscribing to Glossary Events    Glossary administrators can subscribe to be notified about various glossary activities  Subscription  notices can be delivered via the uPerform personal page or email message  or via both methods     Subscribing to a Glossary Event  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click Subscribe on the left menu     3  Select one or more of the following events to which you want to subscribe     Field  Description             Globalization Complete A batch globalization task has completed     New Term Added A new term has been manually added to the glossary  or added as a result of globalization     New Definition A new definition has been manually added to the  glossary     New Suggestion Added An author has suggested a new definition for a term     4  Select one or more of the following options      Option E CORN DESCHPHER E    Post notifications to my Select this option to rec
36.   direct link in the PeopleSoft 9 application     Creating the Custom Help Link in PeopleSoft 9    1     In the PeopleSoft application navigate to the PEOPLETOOLS  gt WEB PROFILE  gt  WEB  PROFILE CONFIGURATION page     Click Search     Click the Profile Name you specified during the PeopleSoft Pure Internet Architecture  installation     Change the value for the Help URL field to the URL from the connection profile you  specified in Specifying a Connection with the uPerform Server     Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  321    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring ANCILE Help Launchpad to Deliver Context Sensitive  Help    ANCILE Help Launchpad works in conjunction with the uPerform client and server to help you  deliver content to end users through a direct link in the SAP Help system     Configuring Help Launchpad to Provide Context Sensitive Help via the uPerform  Server    To configure Help Launchpad to provide context sensitive help using uPerform  refer to the Help  Launchpad for ANCILE uPerform user manual     Please note that the following modifications must be made     CJ Help Launchpad should be set to launch as  Browser  not controlled          O The screen size  location  and stay on top functionalities are controlled by uPerform   and will override the Help Launchpad defaults customizations        322 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring Generic Web Pages for Use with Context Sensitive Help    C
37.   en US   Sale   Default     Spanish  Spain   es ES   Sales ES    Group Assignments    No group filters applied    Document Library Context    RWD uPerform Workspace  gt  AcmeCorp Project  gt  Document Library  gt  Sales Division  gt  Sales    Related Documents    6  Under Translations  select the translation you want to enable or disable     7  Perform one of the following     If You Want To    Enable a translation for display onthe   Click Enable Translation in the left menu   end user website       Disable a translation for display on the   Click Disable Translation in the left menu   end user website You cannot disable the default translation     8  Click OK     Receiving Notifications About Documents    When you check a translated document into the server  you are automatically subscribed to the  translation  When changes are made to the original document from which the translation was  made  you will receive a notification via email and a posting on your personal page     Working with Related Content    Related content is uPerform content that is associated with other uPerform content within the  same project on the server  Related content is used in conjunction with group based filtering   Related content does not share properties with other content but rather allows you to identify  content with similar characteristics for display on your end user website  The act of relating  content is performed from a binder        98    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working
38.   placeholders will be populated during document check in  The placeholder includes the Info Pak  GUID  filename  document title  document type  and version     A Web Architect HTX sets and the information contained within the sets is not migrated  to uPerform  Refer to the companion manual  ANCILE uPerform Administration for  more information on customizing your uPerform server environment     Activities During Glossary Processing    During migration of Info Pak   Glossary data  the Migration Wizard gathers information about the  Glossary base definition for terms and applies this definition at the project level  to apply to only  the project selected at the beginning of migration      The Glossary can be migrated without mapping properties to a context  folder  within the  document library  but the Info Pak base definition will become the uPerform project definition and  the Info Pak key property based definitions will become uPerform suggestions     Multiple migrations to one project are only permitted for the document check in activity  You  cannot migrate Web Architect and Glossary data into the same project more than once     A After migration  the Info Pak and uPerform glossaries do not remain synchronized  The  migrated data will be applied to uPerform documents only  Info Pak documents only  use the Info Pak   Glossary  and the Info Pak   Glossary must be maintained separately  if updates to it are required     Q After migration  a glossary log is stored in the follo
39.   your email notification via email message     address   Specify one of the following email notification    types  daily  weekly  or immediately after an event   If you select the Immediate radio button  specify a  notification type        Click OK        134    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Publishing Courses to an LMS    Courses with assessment sections can be tracked using a Learning Management System  LMS    When you publish to an LMS  uPerform leverages the Package Exchange Notification Services   PENS  standard to support the transfer of published content to the LMS     Tracking functionality includes the collection  receipt  and update notifications which display in  the LMS Transactions area on the content cover page     You must be a system administrator  project administrator  or publishing administrator to add   enable  or disable an LMS instance within the uPerform server     Adding a New LMS    Q If you plan to publish courses to the ANCILE uLearn LMS  ensure that anonymous  access is enabled for the project  For more information  refer to Specifying Project  Settings  on page 72      1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click LMS Settings in the Server Administration area     4  Click New LMS on the left menu     New LMS       Description     URL   URL Encoding  ute Y    Authentication Required     Yes    z lt   dE    Active Serv
40.  173  176  deleting   177  updating   176  terms and definitions   173  top banner   19  transformation   355  executing   355  Info Pak   355  359  transformation editing   360  transformation functionality   331       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     371    Index       transforming documents   355  359  translated content   97  disabling   97  enabling   97  translations   93  94  96  97  98  192  checking in   94  create   94  setting default    97  viewing   96  viewing from editor   96  viewing from server   96  U  unassigning   138  project to LMS    138  uninstalling   333  Migration Wizard   333  updating   34  definition   167  168  folders   83  groups    55  terms   176  user account   34  website folders   114  workflow    148  uPerform   2  5  applications   2  overview   2  uPerform document   296  recording   296  user   32  33  34  35  assigning to project   32  creating    31  finding   33  user account   31  adding   31  deleting   35  recovering    35  requesting   11  36  updating   34  user information source   37  38  41  45  47  adding   38  45  create   37  editing   41  45  user manual   4  conventions   4  users  roles  and groups   30    user information source   37  38  41  45   47  V  verisioning   70  version   69  rollback   101  templates    69  version history   101  overview   101  viewing from server   101  view   80  193  195  199  imported glossary   193  viewing term summary   189  viewing term usage   188  viewing undefined terms   189  viewing
41.  22  left menu   22  Oracle   299  connection   299  create a template   294  end user   304  help   325  P  password    11  retrieving   11  PENS    135  PeopleSoft   321  personal page   24  populating   76  document library   76  preparing   360  product information   15  product support center   15  accessing from server   15  projects   66  anonymous access   72  creating   66    deleting   74   editing   67   overview   66  72  properties   224   built in   224   custom    225  publish   134  135   content from the server   129   courses to LMS   e 135  publish queue   129  130   adding document   129   history   130   view   130  131  publishing role   53   assigning user   53  R  receiving notifications   147   author   147   reviewer   147  recording   uPerform document   296  recovering    35   user account    35  rejecting   180   suggestions   180  rejecting documents   150  related content   99  100   create    99   modify    99   removing relationship   100  removing   117  181   context   117   synonym   181  replying   159   discussions   159  reports   188  197  199  201  202  205  207    209   Export   201   View Custom   199  republishing   132  requesting   11   end user account   11   user account   36  retrieving   11   password    11  reviewer   147       370    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Index       receiving notifications   147  rich text   171  disabling in glossary   171  enabling in glossary   171  roles   30  52  53  54  assigning user   53  findin
42.  339    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       5  Click Next        Migration Wizard     J Migration    Step 1  Migration Actions  Specify the migration action you want to complete        Migrate Info Pak content into a uPerform project     Batch check in Info Pak documents     Update a uPerform template for transforming Info Pak documents       Transform Info Pak documents to uPerform documents        6  Select one of the following options   If You Want To  Execute a migration run for the first Select the Migrate Info Pak content into a  time uPerform project radio button   Run a previous migration on a blank Select the Migrate Info Pak Content into a  project Uperform project radio button   Batch check in Info Pak documents Select the Batch check in Info Pak documents   radio button     Update a uPerform template for trans    Select the Update a uPerform template for   formation transforming Info Pak documents radio but   ton  and refer to Updating a Template for Use  with Transformation  on page 348      Transform Info Pak documents to Select the Transform Info Pak documents to  uPerform documents uPerform documents radio button  and refer to  Executing the Transformation  on page 355         7T  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration   y Migration  Step 2  Create Migration File  By creating a migration file  you can store the migration otpions as a baseline for any future migrations  Either select    a saved migration as a baseline  or select   new   to 
43.  4  Choose from the following options     Field  Description                     Course Preview Select an option from the drop down list to display  which style course you want to preview     Q You can create an option by duplicating  and modifying the Course publication  type as described in Duplicating   Deleting  and Moving Publication  Types  on page 232      Simulation Preview Select an option from the drop down list to display  which style simulation you want to preview     Q You can create an option by duplicating  and modifying the Simulation  publication type as described in  Duplicating  Deleting  and Moving  Publication Types  on page 232         5  Select a publication type from the Manage All Publications list in the task pane   6  Click Select Phrase     7T  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add   Select a language from the left   Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK   Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a section Click Add   Select a section from the list   Click OK        Remove a section Click Remove   At the prompt  click Yes     Move the section earlier in the list Click Move Up one or more times as needed        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  231    Chapter 11  Using Author Templ
44.  ADMINISTRATOR                    E  Manage i Content Administration i   Browser  Hierarchy H     Email  i f Workflow i  Review  amp  i  amp   2    Suggest i Collab  i Glossa al  Terms     i Engine User MESS  Definitions e Accounts j    eb  eS S torta  QS o Ce  Sen  MJ  S  y Search 7 Personal  i Home Page  Check in   out  amp    amp Commence BR  wt Search   Workflow Receive Alert   Review  amp  Call Help Messages   Suggest   Glossary   Terms       Receive  uPerform  Notifications  END USER  Receive uPerform    Browser  Notifications  amp     Email  Workflow    Email    uPerform Authoring  Interface       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 2  Getting Started          Accessing the Server Workspace    The system administrator typically provides authors and project administrators with an account  and access rights to the server     For detailed instructions on creating users  refer to Managing Users  Roles  and Groups  on page  29      Logging Into the Server    1  Enter your uPerform server URL in your web browser Address field to display the Welcome  window     A If you are using Windows Authentication Single Sign On  SSO   you must enable  uPerform as a trusted site in your web browser via the browser security options menu  in order to display the uPerform website     2  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Explore the server workspace   Refer to Exploring the Server Workspace  on page 17      via a single sign on  SSO   connection    3  Click Log In to t
45.  Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Executing the Transformation    The Migration Wizard is available from the Microsoft Windows Start menu  The Migration  Wizard interface is available in all languages supported by uPerform     The Migration Wizard will gather information at each step for use in future steps  but no  transformation activities will occur until the Wizard is completed     Q If you are using multiple Info Pak project settings files  it is recommended that you  create and specify a unique uPerform template for each transformation run  If you have  created custom sections for use in your Info Pak documents  you must also create these  custom sections in your uPerform template     A Info Pak screenflows are not transformed to uPerform documents     Transforming Info Pak Documents and Simulations    Q For information on best practices in planning and executing the transformation  refer to  the Transitioning from ANCILE Info Pak to ANCILE uPerform white paper on the  Product Support Center at https   products ancile com     1  Select START  gt  PROGRAMS  gt  ANCILE UPERFORM  gt  MIGRATION WIZARD to open the  migration wizard        Migration Wizard   Migration     J Migration    Migration Prerequisites  Ensure these requirements are met before you start the Info Pak migration process     The uPerfor server is up and running   At least one uPerform project is available   The uPerform server is accessible from your computer     Info Pak Admin products
46.  Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       C rur Ee    uPerform Template Displays the uPerform template associated with the  document     Hit Count Displays the number of views from the end user  website   Hit count is determined per browser session when  logged in as an end user or when accessing the  server as an anonymous user  Hit count does not  provide any information on user who accessed the  document     Workflow  if applicable  If workflow has been initiated on this item  the  workflow setting  status  and reviewer sequence is  displayed in the upper right     For more information on workflow  refer to Using  Workflow  on page 143      Version History  if If earlier versions of this item exist  the previous   applicable  versions are displayed  You can rollback to the  previous version to make that version the current  version     For more information on versioning  refer to Using  Version History  on page 101      Document Library Context The location in the document library in which the  content resides     Website Context  if The location s  in the website to which the content is  applicable  linked     For more information on specifying website context   refer to Assigning a Website Context to Document  Library Content  on page 115      Author Discussion Hyperlinks to discussion messages contributed by  authors     For more information on author discussions  refer to  Using Subscriptions Within a Discussion  on page  160      Website Discussion Hyperlink
47.  Code Contains Any ME25  VAOI  will return all documents with the Transaction  Code property set to ME25 OR VAOI     Contains the exact value specified in Step 18     19  Enter a value s  in the Value field     20  Click Add     21  Repeat Steps 17 through 20 to add additional properties and filtering conditions to the    dynamic website folder     22  Click Save     Editing a Dynamic Website Folder    1  Click  amp   siss  in the uPerform server workspace     2  Click on the project name   3  Click Website   4  Select the dynamic website folder     5  Select Edit Properties     6  Complete review the following fields     Field    Description  Enter a name for the dynamic website folder        Enter amplifying information about the folder     7T  Optionally  edit the language filter        122    ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Chapter 6  Working With the Website       8  Perform one of the following options     f You Want To    Add multiple languages Click Add Multiple Languages  and go to Step  9     Disable multiple languages Click Disable Multiple Languages  and go to  Step 12        Edit Dynamic Website Folder    This wizard allows you to create a dynamic website folder that searches for documents based on specified filter conditions      Enabling multi language support allows authors to set a name and description for any of the supported languages  This language specific name and description vill  display based on the users language preferences  as set in My Account       
48.  Exclude URLs from context sensitive   Click the Request Context Sensitive Help  help for Generic CSH plug in toolbar button  or select HELP  gt  ANCILE  UPERFORM HELP SETTINGS       Enter a URL in the URLS TO EXCLUDE  FROM CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP  field           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  325    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       If You Want To    View context sensitive help for Refer to the Help Launchpad for ANCILE  applications using Help Launchpad uPerform user manual     Go to Step 4     View context sensitive help for Select the application s Help control   Windows based applications  Go to Step 4        4  A new browser window will open  displaying the following potential help options   O If asingle help document has been created  the document displays in the new browser  window     O If more than one help document has been created  a list of documents displays in the  browser window        CJ If no help document has been created  a zero search result window displays     Le If stay on top is enabled  the help document remains on top of the application screen   Stay on top is only supported for Internet Explorer 7 and 8     5  Choose from the following options     If You Want To    Select a help document Click on the hyperlink for the document you  wish to view     Access the  Application Name  Help Click  Application Name  Help in the upper left  Center to display default help for the application     This option is available if a BaseHelp URL was  specified when con
49.  If Send me an email immediately after each event is selected  select one of the following  options     If You Want To    Use default subject in immediate email   Select Use default subject in email header   notifications       Add a custom prefix to the subject in Select Add prefix  entered below  to subject in  immediate email notifications email header    Enter a custom subject in immediate Select Replace default subject in email header  email notifications with text below        10  If Add prefix  entered below  to subject in email header or Replace default subject in  email header with text below is selected  enter text     11  Click OK     Stopping a User Synchronization    Le Synchronization can be stopped at the User Information source level  filter level  or  group level  At the User Information source level the synchronization of any filters  assigned to that user information source will be stopped if those filters are processing  or waiting to process  At the filter level  only the synchronization for that filter will be  stopped  At the group level  all processing and waiting synchronizations will be  stopped     1  Click Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  49    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       3  Perform one of the following actions     if You Want To    Stop synchronization at the User Click User Information Sources in the Users   Information Source leve
50.  In addition   you can elect to remove additional versions  which can save space on the database server by  removing unnecessary content  Major versions are designated by a 0 in the first decimal place of a  version indicator  for example  4 0      A project administrator can specify assessment score tracking  as well as settings for authors   allowing them to create ad hoc workflows  and allowing them to specify website context  A  project administrator can also restrict check in  check out  delete  and rollback functionality to the  owner or administrator for content assigned to them     By default  projects do not automatically have the above options enabled     Enabling Project Settings    1  Click Beis on the left     2  Click on the name of the project to edit        72    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       3  Click Edit Properties on the left menu     Edit General Properties       Name  HR Project    Description     dip Add Multiple Languages     gt  Project Roles     project Settings     Maximum major versions to store     Remove additional versions now  Allow Authors to Assign Website Context  V  Allow Authors to Initiate Ad Hoc Workflows  Enable Anonymous Access  Enable Assessment Score Tracking  Enable content editing and deleting only for owners and administrators  Enable Group Based Filtering    Mi save    cance    4  Choose from the following options     Field Description                       Maximum versions to store E
51.  Italic  Underline Select from the bold  italic  and underline options as  desired     Numbering  Bullets Format the highlighted text as a numbered or  bulleted list     Specify the desired color for the text     Background Color Specify the desired background color for the  definition text    Insert Link Format the highlighted text as a hyperlink to open in  the same window or a new window     Click Save     Q Workflow history is retained for content related to the definition        Deleting a Term    1     2     Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   Enter the term to be deleted in the Find Term field   Click Search    Click Delete Term on the left menu     Click OK     A Deleting a term removes the term and its definition from the glossary  If the term has  associated synonym s   the definitions of the synonyms remain        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  177    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Deleting a Definition  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Enter the term associated with the definition to be deleted in the Find Term field     3  Click Search   B Glossary Terms    Find Term     Order Bsearch       Definitions    Definition  Purchase Request  Language  English  United States     Context     Q Edit     9g Delete    4  Locate the desired definition in the Definitions portion of the window   5  Click Delete     6  Click OK on the confirmation window displayed        178 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working wit
52.  Mail Address Enter your email address  This is where you will    receive all notifications from the ANCILE uPerform  server        A The administrator receives this notification in the Help Desk screen available from the  server workspace and can act on the request to create a new account        12 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 2  Getting Started          Managing Your Account    Your account includes information such as your name  password  time zone  language  and email  address     Editing Your Account Information  1  Click My Account on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click Edit Properties on the left menu     User ID  cbrovn  First Name   c  Last Name   gro    Password   s s s       Password Confirmatio   Timezone    America New York v    Language    English  United States   en US        Email Address    prov     li seve   D cancel    3  Edit the following fields     g If your uPerform user accounts are synchronized  you cannot change the first name   last name  password  or email     Field  Description  Edit the text of the first name   Edit the text of the last name     Password Enter a new password   You should choose a password that is a combination of alphabetic and  numeric characters and one that is not a word found in a standard  dictionary  Your password cannot be blank  and it cannot contain  double byte characters     Password Confirmation Re enter the new password to confirm your entry   Select your time zone from the drop down list     Lang
53.  Select the wait time for notes to display   Note Entry Animation Select Fade In or Display     9  For Standard mode  complete the following fields     Field  Description                     Enabled Select to confirm that this mode is available for  publishing     Display action notes Select the Display action notes checkbox to enable  the display and publishing of the auto generated  action notes in simulations     Display action note tail Select to display action note tail     Display hotspots Select to display hotspots   Note Display Delay Select the wait time for notes to display   Note Entry Animation Select Fade In or Display     10  For Home Page  complete the following fields           Q These options are set in the document properties and are customizable  For more  information on customizing properties  refer to Specifying New Template Settings   Properties  on page 224      Field  Description                  Select Title to display the title on the home page     Author Select Author to display the author on the home  page    Description Select Description to display the description on the  home page        Copyright Select Copyright to display the copyright on the  home page    Publish date Select Publish Date to display the publish date on  the home page        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  239    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       11  For Step Window  complete the following fields     Field  Description             Show step window Select the Show Step Window che
54.  Settings  Simulation  User  Interface Settings  on page 240   Default  Publication Settings  Simulation  LMS Settings   on page 242   and Default Publication Settings   Simulation  Caption Settings  on page 243  for  more information     Select Student Guide under Default Publication  Settings in the task pane     Refer to Default Publication Settings  Student  Guide  on page 246  for more information        234    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       If You Want To    Modify guided help settings    Modify course package settings    Modify course publication settings       Select Guided Help under Default Publication  Settings in the task pane     Refer to Guided Help Settings  Guided Help  General Settings  see  Default Publication  Settings  Guided Help  General Settings  on  page 247   refer to Guided Help Settings  User  Interface Settings  see  Default Publication  Settings  Guided Help  User Interface Settings   on page 249   refer to Guided Help Settings   Guided Help Captions  see  Default Publication  Settings  Guided Help  Guided Help Captions   on page 251   refer to Guided Help Settings   Mobile Device Publication Settings  see  Default  Publication Settings  Guided Help  Mobile  Device Publication Settings  on page 252  for  more information     Select Course Package under Default  Publication Settings in the task pane     Refer to Default Publication Settings  Course  Package for more information     Select Course under Default Pub
55.  With the Document Library       Creating Related Content    1     2     7     8     9     Click  essissts in the uPerform server workspace    Click on the project name    Click Document Library    Select the folder containing the content for which you want to create a relationship   Click on the content for which you want to create a relationship     Click Edit Related Documents in the left menu     Edit Related Documents                   Related Documents    Document Library  gt  Human Resources  gt  HR    Document Library  gt  Sales Division  gt  Sales    In the tree view  expand the folder that contains the content you want to relate   Select the checkbox es  next to the content you want to relate     Click Save     Modifying Related Content    1     2     Click isis  in the uPerform server workspace    Click on the project name    Click Document Library    Select the folder containing the file for which you want to edit a relationship     Click on the content for which you want to edit a relationship        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  99    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       6  Click Edit Related Documents in the left navigation page     E  B9 Document Library                Related Documents    Document Library  gt  Human Resources  gt  HR     W save   C3 cance  7T  Inthe tree view  expand the folder that contains the relationship you want to modify     8  Select or deselect the checkbox es  next to the content you want to add or remove from the  relationshi
56.  a fixed object   Select the Fixed radio button   when generating reports       15  Click Add   16  Repeat Steps 12 through 15 to add additional filters to the report   17  Optionally  click Delete next to a filter to remove it from the report     18  Click Save     Q9 Refer to Viewing Reports  on page 199  and Exporting Reports  on page 200  for  information on viewing the report output        204 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports          Create and Edit Custom Reports    Creating Custom Reports  1  Click Reports in the left menu     2  Click New Report in the left menu     New Report    This wizard will allow you to create a custom report which can be run against this uPerform server  Please enter a name and description for this report   Report Name     Description     Template  None    Search all templates    Next    cancel    3  Complete the following fields     Report Name Enter a name for the report   Enter a description for the report     Template Optionally  select the template associated with the  report from the drop down list  This gives you the  ability to create filters using template properties     Search all templates Select this option to determine if you want to search    properties for all templates     Deselect this option to specify that you want the  search performed only on the template selected in  the Template drop down list        4  Click Next     New Report    Please select the columns you want in the report     Available Columns 
57.  a tab   delimited text file where the first column contains the term and the second column contains the  definition  You can only import one definition per term  If you are working with double byte  characters  the file should be in UTF 8 double byte format     Exporting a glossary allows you to create a tab delimited file of term and definition pairs in a  selected language and context     Exporting translations allows you to create an XLIFF file for translating existing definitions in    multiple languages     A If you plan to migrate an Info Pak glossary  ANCILE recommends that you use the  Migration Wizard  For more information  refer to Incorporating Info Pak Content  on    page 329      Importing a Glossary    1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area     3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area     4  Click Import on the left menu     5  Click Import Glossary on the left menu     Import Glossary       Import Name        Import File     Browse        English  United States  v    Destination Language            v  Import Undefined Terms          Destination Context s        E  M  scollaboration Project                M  Acme ERP Project       Current Contexts    No contexts have been selected     i  Qoi       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     191    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                   1      Import Name 
58.  a user based on their event  notification settings        10  Click OK     Editing User Information Source Properties    Q A user source cannot be edited if a filter assigned to it is synchronizing     1  Click Administration on the left menu    2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area    3  Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Click on the  User Source  hyperlink    5  Select Edit Properties from the left menu     6  Choose from the following options     If You Want To Then  Edit a user information source froma _  Go to Step 7   Directory server       Edit a user information source froma _  Go to Step 9   file    ANCILE Solutions  Inc  41       Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Edit User Information Source    Location  LDAP   acmeds com 389                      Page Size  500  Security Connection    5  Simple    Requires user distinguished name and password   User ID jdoe acmegs com  Password  Password Confirmation   Anonymous  Field Mapping uPerform Fields Fields  User ID sAMAccountName  Unique Identifier distinguishedName  Email Address mail  First Name GivenName  Last Name sn  J  Enable Automatic Synchronization  Send Account Created Notifications    Previous  ME oK    cancel    7T  Complete the following fields     Field     Description  Enter the URL for the directory server     Page Size Enter the number of records to retrieve at one  time  If your director server supports page size  limits  ensu
59.  as a safety net from which to restore deleted content  When a user  deletes content objects  discussions  folders  and subfolders  these items are moved to a recycle  bin  they are not permanently deleted from the uPerform server     There is one recycle bin for each uPerform project  A project administrator can empty the recycle  bin for a project  The system administrator can restore or delete items for the entire server  When   restored  the item is returned to its original location in the uPerform document library  The restore  operation sets the owner of the object to the user who restored the item  When objects are deleted   from the recycle bin  they are permanently removed from the server     A    A deleted project is not sent to the recycle bin  A deleted project  including all of its  documents  messages  and folders  cannot be restored     Restoring an Item From the Recycle Bin    1    2     Log into the uPerform server via a web browser   Click iigssissita    Select the project from which the item was deleted   Click Recycle Bin on the left menu    Click on the hyperlink of the object to restore     Click OK to restore the object     Deleting an Item from the Recycle Bin    1     2     Log into the uPerform server via a web browser   Click iita    Select the project from which the item was deleted   Click Recycle Bin on the left menu     Click Empty Recycle Bin        108    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       6  Select th
60.  cannot be found  The  context sensitive help solution for  SRM cannot determine whether or not  a specific help page exists on a given  website     SCREEN_ID_TEXT Message text used to indicate the screen ID     SHOW_ID Determines whether the screen ID is displayed in  the new window launched from the screen Help  link   true   show screen ID  false   show help content       13  Save the wpintegration js file   14  Select the BBPGLOBAL Internet Service from the Object Navigator list     15  Click Publish     Q You should receive a message at the bottom of the screen stating the object published  successfully        312 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       16  Refresh the SRM screen displayed in the web browser     Q You may need to clear your browser s cache or Temporary Internet Files     Q This modification affects all screens in the SRM system  Be sure to verify that each  screen has online help available     Determining the Screen ID    Each screen in an SRM system has a unique alphanumeric identifier  ID   This ID can be used as  a reliable link between an SRM screen and its related help content  To link an SRM screen to  help content  the ID must first be included in the applicable uPerform document s      If the SHOW D property is set to true  any user with access to an SRM screen can determine its    ID using the Help link   1  Inthe wpintegration js file  ensure that the SHOW ID property is set to true   2  Save the wpintegration js file
61.  click on the name of the skin     Q A list of previous versions is displayed in the Version History portion of the screen     Click Rollback on the left menu to set the current version of the skin to the previous version     A When you confirm the rollback  the current version of the skin will be permanently  deleted from the server     Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  289    Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files          Guidance on Modifying Cascading Style Sheets    Guidance on Modifying Cascading Style Sheets    You can modify the uPerformEndUserDocument css file to incorporate your corporate standards   for example  font and color scheme      g A complete tutorial on modifying cascading style sheets is beyond the scope of this  manual  Several books and websites discuss this topic in detail  In particular  the World  Wide Web Consortium  W3C  provides helpful information at  http   www w3 org Style CSS      The following table provides general guidance on performing common customization tasks in the  style sheets     WYouWantTo  eote  Wody    Customize the placement of  The assessment section of the   div assessmentButtons to set the text   the Continue button on CSS file  alignment and background    assessment stencils div assessmentButtons  input type button  to set the borders  and background of all the assessment  buttons     input btnContinue  input btnRetry   input btnReset  input btnShowMe  and input btnSkipSim to set border   color and tex
62.  differ  between location or business units  To create translated files  you must enable locales on the  server  For more information  refer to  Configuring Locale Settings  in the ANCILE uPerform  Administration manual     Checking in translated content stores the translated content in the Translations area of the binder  containing the original uPerform content  In addition  uPerform allows you to use the uPerform  client to check in a completely separate document in another language  The additional document  must be of the same type and must be in another language than the original document        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  93    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Creating Translated Content    1     Using the uPerform client  perform one of the following     If You Want To    Enable a translation of the original Open an existing uPerform document     document into a secondary language    Click File gt Save As    on the original document     Go to Step 2     Create a new document in a secondary   Refer to Creating Content in the Creating  language  Content with ANCILE uPerform companion  manual        Q Content must be checked into the server     Select File  gt  Save As       Select the New Translation option   Select a language from the drop down list   Click Save     Enter a name in the File name field     A Avoid the use of special characters when naming your content     Click Save     Checking Translated Content Into the Server    1     Create or open the 
63.  document in which the term  is used     Click on the document name to go to the document    cover page     Date Last Modified Date and time of the last document modification   Last Modified By Name of the author who last modified the document     6  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the report           188 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Viewing Undefined Terms  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click View Undefined Terms on the left menu     3  Review the following information     Field  Description                   Term Click on the hyperlinked term name to go to the  term page     Date Last Modified Date and time of the last term modification     4  Optionally  to delete an undefined term  click Delete to the right of the term        5  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the report     Viewing Unused Terms  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click View Unused Terms on the left menu     3  Review the following information     Field  Description          Term Click on the hyperlinked term name to go to the  term page     Date Last Modified Date and time of the last term modification   Number of Definitions Number of definitions in the database for each term     4  Optionally  to delete an unused term  click Delete to the right of the term        5  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the report     Viewing Te
64.  enabled in this template Select or deselect one or more checkboxes in the    Visible column     Select all languages to be used in this       Select Check All   template     5  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        Specifying General Settings  Hotspot Images  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  221    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Hotspot Images in the task pane     images             4  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add an image Click Add    BRENNEN CN   Update an image Select an image from the Images list and click  Update    ue RN Browse to the updated image and click Open     Delete an image Select an image from the  mages list and click  Delete   Click Yes     Choose a replacement image Select an image from the  mages list   Click the Replacement Image drop down list and  select an image        5  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Specifying General Settings  View Info Pak Settings    Q Info Pak settings are available only for templates used in conjunction with the  Migration Wizard  Info Pak settings are not configurable within the template  For more  information on Migration Wizard  refer to Incorporating Info Pak Content  on page    329    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        222 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Select Info Pak Settin
65.  extension     Create and Open a New Author Template  The following best practices apply to your use of author templates     O Create a new template using the uPerform FILE  gt  NEW menu  Do not copy and  rename a  udt file  The copy process renames the file but does not modify the  template s unique identifier  A uPerform document is linked to a template via the  template identifier  not the template name     CJ After creating a  udt file  do not rename the file via Microsoft Windows Explorer as  this may cause an author to have multiple template files with the same identifier        214 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Creating a New Author Template    1     From the editor  select FILE  gt  NEW     Name  Type   Document    Template     Course Templaeud          Simulation Mobile Device udt                   Language   English  United States     Location     C Users vjenshak Documents V     Browse         0K   Cancel    Enter a name for the new template in the Name field   Select Template from the Type drop down list     In the Template listbox  select a template from which you would like to create a new tem   plate     Click OK     Q Refer to the following subsections for more information on customizing the template     Opening a Template    1     2     From the editor  select FILE  gt  OPEN  gt  TEMPLATE   Select the template you want to open   Optionally  select Lock template for editing     Click OK     Q The standard author template de
66.  following fields     Fild  Description     0    Player Colors Select a background color  and primary and  secondary colors for the banner background from  the drop down list     Text Colors Select a primary color for the banner text from the  drop down list     Q Optionally  specify custom colors by clicking Select to the right of the color drop   down list        7  Choose from the following options     Field  Description                       Enable Transitions Enables a smooth  animated transmission from step  to step     Reuse existing window Uses the same window when an external link is  launched from a simulation     Hide audio bar when audio is   Hides the audio bar when audio is not present   not present    Do not resize Opens the simulation in the current window size     Resize and center window Opens the simulation at the size specified by the  screen width and height  and centers the simulation  window        Start in full screen mode Opens the simulation in full screen mode     ANCILE Solutions  Inc  241       Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       8  Under Screen  select a minimum and maximum screen height and width     Q This option is available only if Resize and center window is selected     9  Under Maximum Screen Size  select a minimum or maximum screen size     10  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Simulation  LMS Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar   3  Se
67.  glossary  the term is added to the glossary with a  blank definition  The glossary will then need to be updated with a customized definition of the  new term  You can then globalize to distribute the update to the documents containing the term     If your glossary administrator has enabled the centralized glossary  all uPerform documents will  be globalized upon check in  Non uPerform documents  such as managed documents  are not  globalized     Check In        __Batch Globalize as  finitions Change       Check Out a  Updated Content Authors    The glossary functionality is not case sensitive  meaning that a term in a document will be  considered the same as a term in the glossary regardless of whether the same capitalization rules  are applied  Purchase order and Purchase Order in documents are considered the same term  The  Glossary is character string dependent  however  Purchase order  one space  is different than  Purchase order  two spaces      During globalization  each globalized document receives a minor version update only if  modifications have been made to the document  for example  1 1  2 1  3 2         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  183    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Globalizing Documents    You can globalize a single document directly from the editor workspace  In addition  the globalize  queue on the server can be configured to automatically globalize documents daily at off peak  hours  Documents are automatically placed in the queue when 1  the defini
68.  group based filtering before assigning filters to content  For  more information  refer to Specifying Project Settings  on page 72      1  Click   amp   sisss  on the upper left     m    Select the project that contains the content for which you want to create a group filter     3  Click Document Library     A    Select the folder that contains the content for which you want to create a group filter     m    Select the content for which you would like to create a group filter     Q This functionality is not available for managed documents     6  Click Assign Group Filter in the left navigation bar     Assign Group Filter    Please drag the documents on the right to the group name it should be assigned to on the left  Documents can be assigned to multiple groups  but  each group can only have one document assignment     Content Groups Related Documents  El Acme Corporation All Users Sales Timesheet  Administrative Group  HR Group  Sales Group  J Save   C3 cancel    7  Drag the content from the Related Documents list to the corresponding group in the Content  Groups list     Content Groups    E  Acme Corporation All Users  Administrative Group  HR Group    Sales Grou       8  Repeat Step 7 to add content to additional groups     9  Click Save     Deleting a Group Filter  1  Click sisi  on the upper left   2  Select the project that contains the group filter you want to delete     3  Click Document Library        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  61    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  an
69.  in the Mapped Sections list  To remove a mapping  click on the  mapping in the Mapped Sections list and click Remove     25  Click Next          Migration Wizard   Migration   8  Migration  Step 9  Migrate Glossary  Select thelnfo Pak Glossary profile you want to migrate to the uPerform server  If you do nat want to migrate an Info    Pak glossary at this time  click Next    Glossary Profile     Glossary Database           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  345    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       26  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To  Migrate your Info Pak glossary Go to Step 27        Skip the Info Pak glossary and proceed  Click Next  and go to Step 29   with the migration    27  Browse to the location of your Glossary profile     Q Profile  xml files are typically stored at C  Documents and Settings  Y our  Username  My Documents Info pak profiles glossary     28  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration  9 R       J Migration    Step 10  Glossary Options  Specify how the definitions in this Info Pak glossary wil be migrated to the uPerform server     Assign Definitions To  O ne     9  Project root only             Import definitions without context as suggestions        Previous  Next       29  Select from the following options     If You Want To  Migrate no definitions Select the None radio button     Assign Info Pak default definitions to   Select the Project root only checkbox   the project root only    Map any key property specific Sel
70.  in the Users  Roles  and Groups area to display a list of all roles in the    uPerform system        54    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          Creating and Updating Groups    Groups are an optional functionality within uPerform that can be used to restrict content access to  a subset of users specified by the administrator  Group usage is not restricted to content within a  single project or subfolder within a project  you can assign groups to content across multiple  projects or subfolders in uPerform     A group is created and then content is assigned to the group and made available for use on the end  user website  Users are then assigned to a group so they can access the content  For more  information on the end user website  refer to Working With the Website  on page 111      The top level group on the uPerform server is the default group to which every user is  automatically assigned  This group is called ANCILE uPerform Workspace All Users  however   the name of this group may be different if it was changed during your server customization  If you  have made customizations  look for the name of the top level content group that displays on the  Content Groups page  In order to restrict content access  you must create sub level groups beneath  the top level group  Refer to the procedures in this section for instructions on how to create and  manage groups     Q  Groups are manually created by the system administrator if group 
71.  in your system  the selected filtering conditions and the number of users currently  logged into the system  Please use caution when running reports during peak usage hours and please allow the system an  appropriate amount of time to generate the report before closing the browser     Required Parameters    Field Name Condition Value    Project Is Acme ERP       v ok   C3 cancel    5  Select a project from the Value field     6  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  201    Chapter 10  Using Reports       7  Click Export in the left menu     Export Document Tracking Report  Please select the format for this report and click OK     Export Format    Excel document      V ok   E cance     8  Select an export format from the Export Format drop down list     9  Click OK     Q The export may take several minutes     10  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Open the exported report Click the radio button next to Open with   Click OK     Save the exported report Click the radio button next to Save to Disk   Click OK     Open the file locally on your computer        Using Save as to Copy a Standard Report  1  Click Reports in the left menu     2  Choose from one of the following options     g Copy functionality is not available for assessment reports     If You Want To  Copy a document tracking report Click Document Tracking Report     Copy a published content report Click Published Content Report     Copy a workflow status report Click Workflow Status Report   
72.  is recommended that you leave this option  disabled until you are ready to synchronize user  accounts     For more information on automatic  synchronization  refer to  Schedule Automated  Tasks  in the companion manual ANCILE  uPerform Administration     Send Account Created Notifications This option enables the uPerform server to send  an email to a user based on their event  notification settings        11  Click OK     Deleting a User Information Source    Q A user source cannot be deleted if a filter assigned to it is synchronizing     1  Click Administration on the left menu    2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area    3  Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Click on the  User Source  hyperlink    5  Select Delete User Source on the left menu     6  Click OK     A Clicking OK will delete the user source  its filter s  and any users belonging to the  filter s   unless the users belong to another filter        44 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Working With User Information Source Filters    Filters are used to synchronize a specific segment of a user base in a directory server or file source  to groups within uPerform     Adding a User Information Source Filter  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   3  Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Select the  User Source  hype
73.  left menu of the server workspace     2  Enter the term associated with the definition in the Find Term field     3  Click Search     Bi Glossary Terms    Find Term   Order       Definitions    Definition  Purchase Request  Language  English  United States     Context   A Edit     S   Delete    Suggestions  There are no suggested definitions for this term     Synonyms    4  Locate the desired definition and context in the Definitions portion of the window  and click  Edit     5  Edit the definition     6  Click Save     Content associated with the updated definition will be automatically sent to the globalize queue   Additionally  any content that has been approved via workflow and previously published will be  sent to the publishing queue  This allows you to republish the document  Workflow history is  retained for content related to the definition        176 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Formatting a Definition    1     2     6     Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   Enter the term associated with the definition in the Find Term field   Click Search     Click Edit in the Definitions portion of the window     Highlight the definition text and format as desired using the following options  Depending on  your rich text formatting settings  some of these options may not be available     Field  Description  Select the desired font from the drop down list   Select the desired font size from the drop down list     Bold 
74.  notifications to my daily email report     Add notifications to my weekly email report     Send me email immediately after each event     For all immediate email notifications   Use default subject in email header     Add prefix  entered below  to subject in email header     Replace default subject in email header vith text below        26 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       3  Select one or more of the following options     Post notifications to my Select this option to receive your subscription notification in the My  Personal Page  Alerts section of your uPerform personal page     Send notifications in an email   Select this option to receive your subscription notification via email  report to  your email message     address   Specify one of the following email notification types  daily  weekly  or  immediately after an event     If you specify an immediate email notification  you can elect to use the  default subject in the email subject line  add a prefix to the default  subject  or replace the default subject with custom text        4  Click OK     Q When the content is changed in the future  you will receive a notification on your  personal page and or an email message  Subscription email messages contain a link to  the changed content     Subscriptions to content within dynamic website folders will notify you when the  folder is renamed  subfolders are added or removed  or the search filter is changed   however  due to the filter
75.  of the prompt page     td uiPromptBackground to set the  image URL or background of the  prompt box    div titleTextDiv to set the text color   text alignment and font of the title   div uiPromptText to set the text color     text alignment and font of the prompt  text        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     291    Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files       FYouWantTo  GoTo      Modi    Customize the loading page   The loading section of the div LoadingMessage to set the  in courses  simulations  and   CSS file  background color of the loading page     guided help div LoadingMessage div loadingText  to set the color and text alignment     div loadingImage to set the logo  dimensions and URL           292 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help    The ANCILE uPerform server works in conjunction with ANCILE  Help Launchpad to provide context sensitive help within the SAP GUI  for Windows and HTML GUI environments  In addition  you can  specify a context sensitive help solution directly from the uPerform  server for SAP Enterprise Portal  SAP EP   SAP CRM Web Client   SAP SRM 7 Shopping application  Oracle E Business  PeopleSoft   web applications  and Siebel     Online help allows your end users to access relevant help stored on the  uPerform server from within their current application        293    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Introduction to Online Help    Online performance support materials are most effective when the materia
76.  one of the following options     If You Want To  View a folder level discussion Click on the hyperlink of the discussion     View an author or website discussion Click on the content name   for uPerform content Under Translations  select the translation that    contains the discussion you want to view   Go to Step 7     View an author or website discussion Click on the content name   for a managed document Go to Step 7     Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    View an Author Discussion In the Author Discussion area  view a list of the  author discussion entries        To view the contents of long messages or to view  all entries  click Author Discussion     View a Website Discussion In the Website Discussion area  view a list of the  user discussion entries     To view the contents of long messages or to view  all entries  click on Website Discussion        Click on the hyperlink of the message you want to read        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  157    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Using Discussion Entries    You can create and reply to discussion entries from directly within the uPerform server  workspace     Creating a Discussion Entry    1  Navigate to the desired folder in the uPerform server workspace     2  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To  Create an author or website discussion   Go to Step 3     Create a folder level discussion Click Add Discussion on the left menu   Enter Name and Description   Click Save        
77.  passing score           258 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates    Field  Description                   Users may retake No questions  Users may not retake any questions        Incorrect questions  Users may retake only those  questions that were answered incorrectly        All questions  Users may retake all questions     7  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course  Caption Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar   3  Select Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     4  Select Course Caption Settings from the drop down list        5  Highlight a phrase in the phrase listbox   6  Click Select Phrase     7  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add     Select a language from the left     Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  259    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       If You Want To    Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course  Page Settings    1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar   3  Select Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     4  Sele
78.  published documents assigned to a project          Workflow Status Report    Displays a detailed report of the document workflove assigned to a project     2  Choose from one of the following options     If You Want To    View an assessment performance report   Click Assessment Performance Report  and go  to Step 5     View a document tracking report Click Document Tracking Report   View a published content report Click Published Content Report     View a workflow status report Click Workflow Status Report     A Workflow history information will be  cleared if a new version of a document  is checked in  or if the document is  automatically globalized when a  definition is updated     View a custom report Click on the name of the custom report        3  Review the following fields     Field  Description                           The user who generated the report     Click on this link to obtain information about the    user     Last Modified  If applicable  the date of the last report definition  modification     ANCILE Solutions  Inc  199          Chapter 10  Using Reports       Field  Description                        Selected Columns The columns specified for report generation   Limitations for what the report will return     4  Click View Report in the left menu     View Document Tracking Report    Generating reports can take a significant amount of time and can tax the system  The amount of time it takes to generate a  report is based on the number of documents in your 
79.  set up a proxy server for connecting  to the uPerform server     Username Enter the username for the proxy authentication   Password Enter the password for the proxy authentication     Test Connection Click Test Connection to test your connection to  uPerform           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  341    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Q Username  password  and proxy authentication are not necessary if using NTLM SSO     Q Upon exiting the application  connection information is stored for future use in the  Migration Wizard Application Settings XML file located on the local computer in  C  Users  lt USER gt  A ppData Roaming ANCILE Migration Wizard Version  4 5X AppSettings xml     11  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration       Migration    Step 4  uPerform Project and Template  Specify the uPerform project and template to be used     uPerom Project  Acme ERP          uPerform Template     SS                 Da       12  Complete the following fields     Field  Description      uPerform Project Select the blank project you created for the migra   tion    uPerform Template Select the uPerform template you want to use for  transforming documents     13  Click Next           Migration Wizard   Migration   8  Migration    Step 5  Info Pak Web Architect Settings  Specify the Web Architect configuration files to be used during migration     Web Architect Profile     Content URL     Profile Settings              342 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorpo
80.  term to which the definition should be added in the Find Term field     3  Click Search     Bi Glossary Terms    Find Term   Order       Definitions    Definition  Purchase Request  Language  English  United States     Context   Bedit   f delete    Suggestions  There are no suggested definitions for this term  Synonyms    This term has no synonyms     4  Inthe Definitions portion of the window  click Edit        174 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       5  Click Change Context on the left menu     Change Context       Eg  B  rwo vector Workspace                a U acme ERP                B M  Rwo Trainin  g Project       Current Contexts     RWD uPerform Workspace    M Seve    cance    6  To apply this definition to all projects in the instance  select the  workspace name  checkbox   To apply this definition only to specific projects or folders  contexts   select the checkbox for  the project s  or folder s      Q The definition can reside in the glossary database without a context  but in order for a  definition to be used in a document  at least one context must be applied to the  definition     7  Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  175    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Updating Terms and Definitions    You cannot edit a term  but you can add a term as a synonym and delete the original term  For  additional information on synonyms  refer to Managing Synonyms  on page 181      Editing a Definition  1  Click Glossary on the
81.  the Content area   Click OK     Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        10  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  227    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Specifying New Template Settings  Phrases    Managing Phrases    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Phrases on the status bar     OE             Gerd Proprtns  reves  Rileslens Ter Mody Sectors Resty    3  Select a language from the Language drop down list in the Task Pane     4  Choose a phrase name     Q The following table lists the phrases for actions during recording and the common  phrases for keyboard keys     Field  Description        0 0    Click  s  t  u    Double click  s  t Yu    Right click  s  t  u    Right double click  s  t   u     s   label     t  control type   u   image    s   label     t  control type   u   image    s   label     t  control type   u   image    s   label     t  control type     u   image    Type  os in the  t  u  s   typed text    Drag  s to  t  s   first image   t   second image          228    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Up  Down  Left  Right Press  Up   Press  Down   Press  Left   Press  Right     Page Up  Page Down Press  Page Up   Press  Page Down     Home  End Press  Home   Press  End   Insert  Delete Press  Insert   Press  Del
82.  the Glossary       4  Click Suggest Definition to the right of the definition cell     Suggest New Definition                            Alternate Definitions                Q You can review the alternate definitions available in other document library contexts  from the Suggest New Definition window     5  Enter the definition in the Definition text box   6  Optionally  click Format    to apply formatting options     7T  Click OK     8  Atthe confirmation prompt  click Yes to submit the definition as a suggestion     Entering a Definition When the Centralized Glossary is Disabled  1  Create or open a document in the editor   2  Click the Document tab   3  Navigate to the Field Description table     4  Enter the definition in the Description column of the Field Description table        168 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Browsing the Glossary from the Editor    From the editor  you can browse the entire glossary database and search for one or more specific  terms  The term page displayed when browsing the glossary lists all definitions for the term and  its synonyms     Q If you are using the editor in standalone or offline mode  the glossary is not available  and the associated menu option is grayed out     Viewing a Term and Associated Information    1  Select TOOLS  gt  BROWSE GLOSSARY    from the editor to display the glossary page in a web  browser window     2  Enter the term in the Find Term field   3  Click Search     4  Review
83.  the following information     Field    Description  Definitions Lists all definitions for the term     Suggestions Lists any suggestions contributed by authors  Only glossary  administrators can view suggestions     Synonyms Lists any synonyms available for the term           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  169    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Managing Glossary Settings    The glossary administrator is typically responsible for maintaining the instance wide glossary  settings  These settings affect all projects in the uPerform instance     You must be a part of the uPerform Glossary Administrators group to configure glossary settings   For detailed information on uPerform groups  refer to Managing Users  Roles  and Groups  on  page 29      The following settings can be managed from the server workspace     O Using a centralized glossary  If you do not select to enable the centralized glossary   authors can enter definitions directly into a uPerform document     C  Using rich text in definitions  You can specify the use of rich text formatting  for  example  bold  italic  and underline  in your definitions        O Specifying a default language  You can indicate the language that will be used for a  definition if there is no definition in the document s language     Enabling the Centralized Glossary    1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area     3  Click Glossary in the Server Administ
84.  the following options     If You Want To  View the template cover page Select a template from the list        70 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       If You Want To    View the version history of the  template    Access an earlier version of a template    View a template    Select a template from the list     Click the More or Hide link to display or hide  the version history     The link displays only if there are three or more  versions of the template available    Select a template from the list    Click on the template hyperlink below Version  History    Select a template from the list     Open the template from the uPerform client as  described in Using Author Templates  on page  211            ANCILE Solutions  Inc     71    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Specifying Project Settings    By setting anonymous access on a project  end users will not be required to login to the uPerform  website when requesting help online  When anonymous access is enabled  the anonymous user  and the All Users group will be added to the End User role     By providing optional group based filtering to a project  you can identify the content to which end  users will have access  For more information  refer to Creating and Updating Groups  on page  55      By limiting the number of major document versions that are stored per project  you can ensure  your authors have access to current versions by eliminating any outdated versions 
85.  the iView Portal Page ID  on  page 307   and Including the iView Portal Page  ID in Documents  on page 307      Go to Step 9        4  Open the uPerform document created in Step 2   5  Select FILE  gt  PROPERTIES     6  Select Properties       Properties                                     7  To provide context sensitive help using Oracle E Business  paste the identifier s  into the  Transaction Code property     8  Click OK     9  Save the document        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  297    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       10  From the uPerform client  check your document into the server     g When published  the document will be available for the end user via the help icon in  the application for which you want to provide context sensitive help     Specifying a Connection to the uPerform Server  1  In uPerform  select Administration in the left navigation pane   2  Select Server Administration   3  Select Integration Settings under Server Administration   4  Select Context Sensitive Help Connection Profiles under Integration Settings     5  Select New Connection Profile     New Connection Profile       Name     Description     Application   Orade 11 5         Base Help URL       Browser Settings  Width  40  Height       so    Location   Right w             Stay On Top  IE Only        bil Seve  Qc     6  Complete review the following fields     Q This profile is configurable and can be edited or deleted based upon your end user  needs  You can specify as many connection p
86.  these people from  cbrownGrwd com       uPerform Users    Subject  The approval process for the document called  Sales Time    Message   provide detail as to why process wes stopped   The approval process for the document called    Sales  Timesheet    ves canceled      This document can be found in uPerform at  http   uperformtraining rwduperform com gm document 1       i   a       Stopping the approval process will prevent the document from further  circulation along the workflow queue and remove any existing  approval status     ioc E cance     3  Complete the following fields     Field  Description      To Enter the email address es  or click uPerform Users  to select users from a list     Subject Edit the default subject text  as necessary        As desired  add information to the default message  text     4  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  151    Chapter 7  Using Workflow       Deleting a Workflow Group  1  Click Workflow on the left menu to display a list of existing workflows     2  Click Delete Workflow on the left menu     To delete     1  Which items to remove         select or unselect all                    Human Resources       2  Confirm    Removing the selected items will remove them from this Folder  If items are present in other contexts  as indicated by      then they will continue to exist in those other contexts     3  Select the checkbox to the left of the workflow to be deleted or  optionally  select the  checkbox next to Select All     4  Click 
87.  unused terms    189  W  web documents   87  adding   87  web based help   323  website   126  adding content   118  browsing   79  126  creating   113  119  customizing   141  viewing   139  website context   126  navigating on server   126  website discussion   157  website folders   113  adding folders   113  119  deleting   115  125  updating   114  website navigation   21  workflow   144  145  146  147  148  149   150  151  152  153  approving documents   149  creating   145  deleting   152  notifications   147  rejecting documents   150  stopping   151  updating   148  viewing history   153  workspace   10  server   10       372    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     
88.  website content pages  There are also public discussions that are viewable within  the website context  These include end user to end user discussions and end user to   author discussions  End users contribute to these public discussions via the Website  Discussion link available on website content pages     Folder level  Folder level discussions are created by Administrators in the Document  Library or the website  They are not tied to a specific document or folder but exist as  independent entities  Administrators can create as many different discussions as they  like in a folder and they can be moved to other folders within their context  That is   Document Library folder level discussions must remain in the Document Library and  website discussions must remain in the website context     Discussions can be viewed by authors and administrators via the server workspace        156    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Viewing Discussions    You can view a summary list of both author and website discussions and also drill down to read  individual discussion messages  Discussions are displayed in a standard threaded format to  indicate the hierarchy of message replies     Viewing a Discussion    1     2     7     Click  amp sises  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Document Library     Navigate to the desired folder     g To view a folder level discussion  click on the hyperlink of the discussion     Perform
89. 139    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       When the end user clicks on a help link  all available output formats are displayed           140 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Configuring and Customizing the Website    Refer to the ANCILE uPerform Administration user manual for information on website  customizations        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  141    Chapter 7  Using Workflow    Workflow functionality in ANCILE uPerform allows you to automate  the process of routing content to reviewers  Using uPerform  you can  create and initiate workflow  and allow reviewers to approve or reject  content        143    Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Introduction to Workflow    To facilitate review of content  uPerform allows you to create and initiate workflow processes   During the workflow process  the content is circulated among a list of uPerform users who can  approve or reject the content        144 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Creating and Starting a Workflow    In order to start a workflow on a document  the document must be checked into the server     CJ Administrators can create predefined workflow groups from the server workspace   These workflow groups are available to all projects on the uPerform server        O Authors can create and start ad hoc workflows if granted permission from the project  administrator  For more information  refer to Specifying Project Settings  on page  72      Creating a W
90. 2  Getting Started    The ANCILE uPerform server workspace provides access to several  functions  including project and user account creation  workflow setup   glossary and publishing maintenance  reporting  website setup   configuration  and customization        Chapter 2  Getting Started          Introduction to Managing Content    The uPerform server interface is available via the Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox web  browsers  The procedures in this manual will assume you are using Internet Explorer     The following functionality is available via the server workspace     m                 o QU d       g    Create favorites  subscriptions  and  tell others  notices  Participate in discussions   Create and maintain user accounts   Manage role and group assignments   Create and maintain projects  document libraries  and websites  Create and maintain the glossary   Create and maintain publishing settings   Create workflow routings    Generate reports    Refer to the ANCILE uPerform Administration manual for instructions on installing and  configuring the server and customizing the end user website        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 2  Getting Started       The following diagram illustrates the major functions of the uPerform server and how the server  supports the activities of the author  end user  and administrator     uPerform Server    Administer Projects   4                   andUsers   Create Hierarchy    Check in   out   amp  ve       Workflow       amp     
91. 3  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     4  Scroll down to the Author Discussion or Website Discussion area of the window   5  Click Author Discussion or Website Discussion     6  Click New Message on the left menu     Post a message    Subject     Content     7T  Complete the following fields     Field     Description  Enter the message subject     Content Enter the text of the message     8  Click Save           158 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content       Replying to a Discussion Entry  1  Navigate to the desired folder in the uPerform server workspace     2  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     3  Scroll down to the Author Discussion or Website Discussion area of the window   4  Click Author Discussion or Website Discussion     5  Click Reply to message on the left menu   Post a message    Subject     Content     6  Complete the following fields     Field   Description  Enter the message subject        Content Enter the text of the message     7  Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  159    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Using Subscriptions Within a Discussion    You can subscribe to a discussion to be notified of new messages in the discussion  You can  receive notifications rega
92. 4  Select Style Languages from the task pane     File Edit View Format Tools Help Debug  BSC MO SHG tiani  PF RBiRRARER A BUIS     EE Ta Oxlo ela         205 94                Bahasa Indonesia  Indonesia   catal    catal       e  tina    esk   republika           Manage All Styles  Default Course Content Title Text  Default Course Drag Drop Text  Default Course Page Title Text  Default Course Popup Text  Default Course Questions Text  Default Course Text             dansk  Danmark  Default Course Title Text  Deutsch  Deutschland  Default Text  English  United Kingdom  Document Note  English  United States  Document Title  Example  Example Phrase  Generic Table Text  hrvatski  Hrvatska  Guided Help User Interface  italiano  talia  Link Text  magyar  Magyarorsz  g  Page Description Text  Nederlands  Belgi    Page Title Text  Nederiands  Nederiand  Screen Caption  norsk  bokm  l  Norge  Section Name  polski  Polska  Simulation Note  Portugu  s  Brasi  Simulation User Interface  portugu  s  Portugal  Step  rom  n    Rom  nia  Step Number  suomi  Suomi  Table Header  svenska  Sverige  Table of Contents  Table of Contents Heading 1  Table of Contents Heading 2  Genrapcxn  B  nrapna  Table of Contents Heading 3  pycert  Poccus  Table of Contents Heading 4  Tnu  tne  Table of Contents Heading 5  Ea  HEHE  Table of Contents Heading 6  PROPRA RHE  Table Text  px  Top Navigation Text  B48 6   Applied Styles  Bulk Style Change   Style Languages  Bulk Style Language Changes               
93. 5  Click FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  223    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Specifying New Template Settings  Properties    Managing Built In Properties  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Properties on the status bar     3  Select a built in property from the Task Pane         il    IRIA    uii  s  AAAA ETE ETE CETTE TE    HNHH      3  i    4  To make the property visible to authors in the Properties    window  click the Visible  checkbox     5  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Move the value earlier in the list Click Move Up one or more times as needed   Move the value later in the list Click Move Down one or more times as needed     6  Click Modify                                         Language   English  United Kingdom    English  United States    Espa  ol  Espa  a  alfabetizaci  n intemacional     fran  ais  Canada   fran  ais  France   hrvatski  Hrvatska   italiano  talia    magyar  Magyarorsz  g   Nederlands  Belgi     K                   224 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       7  Perform one of the following options    If You Want To  Make the value visible  Check the Visible checkbox     Make the value translatable     Add a value  Modify a value    Delete a value    Add a custom phrase    Select a phrase       Check the Translatable checkbox  This option is  only available if the Visible checkbox is  checked     Click Add    Enter a value    Cl
94. ANCILE    uPerfornr       User Manual    Managing Content with ANCILE uPerform       Version 4 5    PROPRIETARY RIGHTS NOTICE    This user manual contains proprietary and confidential information of ANCILE Solutions  Inc  This manual is  furnished under license only for the use and information of the licensee  and the content is subject to change  without notice  Use of the contents of this manual for any purpose other than that for which it was provided is  prohibited  This manual may not be reprinted or redistributed to any third party without the prior written  consent of ANCILE Solutions  Inc  ANCILE Solutions  Inc  does not warrant or guarantee the contents of this  user manual     ANCILE uPerform     ANCILE uLearn     ANCILE Info Pak     and ANCILE uBenchmark    are registered  trademarks of ANCILE Solutions  Inc  in the U S  and foreign countries  All other product and company  names referenced herein are the registered or unregistered trademarks of their respective owners     ANCILE    SOLUTIONS    TM    COPYRIGHT    2012 ANCILE Solutions  Inc   ALL RIGHTS RESERVED    ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Contents    Chapter 1  Introduction    ipn iion ian ek oa rara kr was Ea neu cna uk kF   xk End dE pana 1  Wat 38 ANCILE Perron  os eoo oorr ouod rein eot needed eco oeste den edi teta  2  About Lis Mana  oeitt dete opa tetendit qutdcefept tute ense usum do sepa ti Loads 3  Who Should Read This Manual 323i teret obe ote t eS Peut ora tme baal 3  Organization Of This Manual ca
95. Added to view added users   Updated  Select Updated to view updated users     Removed  Select Removed to view removed  users     Warning Select Warning to view warnings from the most  recent sync   Select Error to view errors from the most recent  sync           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  51    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          Managing uPerform Roles    Roles are intended to identify a team of users with a common project  function  or activity  Role  functionality allows you to restrict access to project functionality to specific users     When a project is created  the following three roles are automatically created and associated with    the project     g       End User  Members of the user role can view published content within the project  website and participate in discussions associated with the content     Author  Members of the author role can populate content for the project     Administrator  Members of the administrator role can create document library and  website hierarchies and workflows     Access is cumulative for the roles  In other words  a member of the administrator role can perform  all the actions of members of the user and author roles  A member of the author role can perform  all actions of the user role     In addition  there are three instance wide server roles that are created upon installation of the  uPerform server     m     uPerform Glossary Administrators  Members of the glossary administrator role can   enable and disable the 
96. All actions within this procedure should be performed by a Siebel administrator using    Siebel Tools  The administrator should be familiar with the topics discussed in the   Developing and Deploying Siebel Business Applications   document provided by  Oracle Siebel     1  Create a new project to contain changes needed to add a context sensitive help link from  Siebel 8 to the uPerform server  Be sure to include a name and description for the project     2  Check out the context sensitive help project     3  Check out the menu used in the target application        318 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       4  Create a new symbolic string for the menu item using the following values     Q A symbolic string must be created for each locale     Description    Name Enter a name for the symbolic string  Current String Value Enter the string value    Definition Enter a definition  Comment Enter any amplifying information about the string    5  Save the string     Project Enter the project name created in Step 1        6  Create a new business service using the following values     Description  Enter a name for the service     Project Enter the project name created in Step 1       Enter any amplifying information about the service     7  Save the service     8  Create a new Business Service Method called calluPerform    9  Right click on the business service you created in Step 6    10  Select Edit Server Scripts    11  Select eScript    12  Paste the ANCI
97. Checkin  and in Windows Vista   C  Users App Data Roaming ANCILE uPerform Version X X Logs BatchCheckin   The log filename is prefaced with  BatchCheckIn_  and is date  and timestamped     O Confirm that unintended documents have not been migrated        O Confirm the folder assignment of all documents        352 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Using the Info Pak Properties Specified in the uPerform Project  After migration  a link to Info Pak properties is displayed on the project properties page     Edit this Project  Name    acme Migration Project  Description  Migration of Info Pak Content  a Add multiple Languages    RWD Info Pak Properties     Project Groups     em Save       cancel    These Info Pak properties only exist after importing Web Architect data during migration  After  initial creation  these properties can only be modified from the uPerform system     If you are not modifying your Info Pak publishing options  for example  specifying to use websafe  paths or specifying additional output formats  and the location of the published output does not  change  you do not need to edit these Info Pak properties from within uPerform     If your publishing options or location change  you must edit these properties  Click   to the left of  ANCILE Info Pak Properties to expand the properties list       RWD Info Pak Properties     wi    Work Instruction postscript pdf ps pdf html htm source    qr  flow Quick Reference  Flow  post
98. ERR ES UIN S USA QU Ee eA Ue SUN Le Pun ea ERR aV e pde 288  Guidance on Modifying Cascading Style Sheets                         eee 290   Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help                                                      293  Introduction to Onlmne Help iais inernet eao ues ges Dacsd E Toca Frust a eS 294  Configuring Oracle E Business for Use with Context Sensitive Help                                     302  Configuring SAP Portal for Use with Context Sensitive Help                        sees 306  Configuring SAP SRM 4 6 for Use with Context Sensitive Help                          esses 311  Configuring SAP CRM Web Client for Use with Context Sensitive Help                               315  Context Sensitive Help for Siebel   s si  cc see Res eee nies ees esas eid 318  Configuring PeopleSoft 9 for Use with Context Sensitive Help                         eee 321  Configuring ANCILE Help Launchpad to Deliver Context Sensitive Help                             322  Configuring Generic Web Pages for Use with Context Sensitive Help                                   323  Providing Help to End  Usetsz   5  pear ecd uidet acne ipae ende qa leu tuse eae 325   Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content                                       329  Introduction to Incorporating Info Pak Content                     eese emen 330   Using Dual Mode Functionality vs  Transformation Functionality                              ses 331  Installing and Uninstalling the Migration Wizard   
99. Enter a name for the import     Import File Click Browse     and navigate to the file you want to  import     Destination Language Select the language for the definitions from the  drop down list     Definition Conflict From the drop down list  select Replace Existing  Resolution Definitions  Add As Suggestion  or Skip  Definition     Import Undefined Terms Select the Import Undefined Terms checkbox to  import undefined terms     7  Select the project s  in the Destination Context s  area to assign the glossary to the project s         8  Click Save     Importing Translations    A Ensure you have exported the glossary for translation and translated the file before  importing into the uPerform server  For more information on exporting a glossary or  translation file  refer to Exporting a Glossary  on page 193  and Exporting Translations   on page 194      1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area    3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area    4  Click Import on the left menu     5  Click Import Translations on the left menu     Import Translations    Import Name        Import File      Browse    Definition Conflict Resolution    Replace Existing Definitions Y    fd seve  Qoae        192 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description           0      Import Name Enter a name for the import     Import File Cli
100. Enter text and use the toolbar to format the text     5  Click Save to add the translated managed document           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  95    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Viewing Translated Content    The parent content must be checked into the server first  or with the translated content via batch  mode  in order to establish the content association  The server will display a link to the translated  content in the Translations area in the binder     From an end user s perspective  the uPerform server creates a language based content filter for  associated content  If the end user s language is set to French  the French associated content  displays  If there is no associated content available in the end user s language  the content displays    in the default language  The end user can also see all versions of content by clicking Show AII  Help Documents on the web page     Viewing Translated Content From the Editor  1  From the uPerform editor  open the content which has associated content     2  Select VIEW    TASK PANE    TRANSLATED DOCUMENTS     Q The Translated Documents task pane opens to list all translated content for the  displayed file         Translations           Click Sales udt  uPerform  Template  tab control     gt  Spanish  Spain   Sales ES             Click Sales udt  uPerform Template  tab control    Saksak  Perform Temptate  on ED    Document   Simulation   Screenfiow Ready connected             Viewing Translated Content From the 
101. Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       stylesheet or omit the stylesheet  For more information on end user website customizations  refer  to the companion manual ANCILE uPerform Administration     Q After migration  you will be prompted to view the log  To view the log  click Yes  The  check in log is stored in the following default locations  In Windows XP   C  Documents and Settings  username  Application Data ANCILE uPerform Version  X X Logs Checkin  and in Windows Vista and Windows 7  C  Users App  Data Roaming ANCILE uPerform Version x x Logs Checkin     Activities During Template Processing  Before you can transform Info Pak documents and simulations  you must update a uPerform  template with Info Pak transformation settings  Updating a template with transformation settings  stores various Info Pak settings and if you choose to    O Automatically generate the exercise section    CJ Transform the procedure section    O Transform procedure from simulation  if a simulation is available       O Section mapping used for transformation    When template processing is complete  you can open the template in the uPerform client to view  the transformation settings under GENERAL  gt  INFO PAK SETTINGS  These settings are not  configurable within the uPerform template editor  To make changes to the Info Pak transformation  settings  you must use the Migration Wizard     A You must assign the template to the blank project you will use to transform Info Pak  docume
102. LE provided script into the Service PreCanInvokeMethod method   13  Save the server script    14  Right click on the business service you created in Step 6    15  Select Edit Browser Scripts    16  Select eScript    17  Paste the code from the ANCILE provided    uPerform Service PreInvokeMethod Browser txt script into the Server PreInvoke  Method        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  319    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       18  In the code pasted into the Server_PreInvoke Method  replace  URL from connection  profile  with the URL of the uPerform server specified in the connection profile  for example   http   uperform company com gm 1 11 5343 csh     19  Save the browser script     20  Using Siebel Tools  create a new command using the following values     Field  Description          21  Save the command        22  Create a new menu item for the menu project using the following values     Field     Description  Caption Enter the string reference created in Step 4     Enter the command created in Step 20   Select the appropriate position     23  Save the menu project        24  Compile  test  and migrate the changes to the production environment        320 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring PeopleSoft 9 for Use with Context Sensitive Help    Context sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from the uPerform server via a
103. Library    1     2     Click   959  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Document Library     Click Add Folder on the left menu     Create a New Folder    Location  Document Library  Name     Description     Complete the following information     Field       Description  Enter the name of the folder        Description Enter amplifying information about the folder and  its contents     Click OK     Repeat Step 4 through Step 6 to create additional folders and subfolders at the desired  locations        76    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Import a Document Library Structure  If you have an existing document library structure in a system such as ARIS or SAP Solution  Manager  you can import this structure into a uPerform document library via an XML file to avoid  losing or having to recreate the document library structure  You can simply import the structure to  uPerform and begin populating your project  If you are working with double byte characters  the  file should be in UTF 8 double byte format     To import a library structure  your target project must have an empty recycle bin and an empty  document library  A project or system administrator can import a structure     Importing a Document Library Structure  1  Create or open a blank project   2  Click Document Library     3  On the left pane  click Import Document Library     Q9 This option is disabled if the library contains content  Ensure th
104. NCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapier 1    1  Using Author Templates       The following diagram illustrates many of the basic uPerform procedural document elements that    you can modify within the template     uPerform Document    Section    Block  xxxPhrasexxx    Section  Each block    has atext style  xxxPhras exxx  Block  xxxPhrasexxx             The document  has apage style           Sections can be             outputas publications           ANCILE Solutions  Inc     213    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates          Managing Author Templates    At the start of your project  you should create a new template and specify your configuration  settings     Multiple templates can be used on a project  The project selection determines the templates that  are available to authors  Each uPerform file is linked to a template via the template   s unique 32 bit  identifier     Any author can create or modify a template  but only authors with proper permissions can check  the modified template into the uPerform server to make it available to other authors and  administrators     During creation and edit  author templates are stored on your computer in the following locations     O For Windows XP  C  Documents and Settings  user name  Application  Data ANCILE uPerform Version X X templates       O For Windows Vista and Windows 7  C  User App  Data Roaming ANCILE uPerform V ersionX X templates    You can manage local templates directly through uPerform  Author templates have a  udt file 
105. NCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Data Element Explanation    Lesson Location The element used to specify the step page at  which the learner terminated the SCO  Also  referred to as the SCO bookmark     Suspend Data The element utilized to persist content specific  information  such as the pages steps the learner  has viewed within the SCO  This element is  primarily utilized by uPerform courses     Raw Score  0 100  The element utilized for specifying the score  achieved by the learner within the SCO  The  value is based on the performance within the  assessment mode of a simulation  or within either  an assessment or terminated branch  with scoring  enabled  inserted into a course     Min Score The minimum score a learner can achieve within  alesson  This value is currently always set to a  value of  0   zero  within published uPerform  content    Max Score The maximum score a learner can achieve within  alesson  This value is currently always set to a  value of  100  within published uPerform  content     Scaled Score  0 10  The element utilized to specify the performance  of a learner within the SCO that is scaled to fit  with the range of 0     1 0  The value is based on  the performance within the assessment mode of a  simulation  or within either an assessment or  terminated branch  with scoring enabled  inserted  into a course     Session Time The time the learner has spent in the lesson  during a given session     Interactions The dat
106. Navigate to the data file and click Open     Update a data file Select the data file to update  and click Update   Navigate to the updated data file  and click  Open    Modity a data file Select a data file  and click Modify   Edit the file  and select FILE    SAVE     Basic knowledge of HTML  XSL  and Java is  required     Optionally  click Change Editor     to specify a  different data file editor     Delete a custom data file Select the custom data file from the list  and click  Delete     At the prompt  click Yes     You cannot delete the standard data files  delivered with uPerform        5  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Specifying General Settings  Languages  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        220 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Languages in the task pane                    Visible Language  Bahasa Indonesia  Indonesia                                                                                magyar  Magyarorsz  g   Nederlands  Belgi                   Nederlands  Nederland   norsk  bokmal  Norge                                                                                                                       SSS  s   S   S   S  S888  SI  S  IS    amp    SI  ST SSS  S   S  ST  ST  S   SI  T  T  ST  ST  S           B48  BA        4  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Manually select languages to be Deselect Use server languages  
107. OK to confirm     5  Click OK to delete     A Deleting a workflow is not the same as stopping a workflow  Deleted workflows  cannot be recovered  Documents using this workflow continue to be processed        152 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Viewing Workflow History    Via the server workspace you can view a document s most recent workflow history so you can  keep track of workflow events as they occur  Events you can track include     m        OU    OU ana   l OU l OU    Version   Owner   Modified Date  Modified By  Workflow Status  Approval Setting  Approved by   Next Approver  Workflow Start Date    Workflow End Date    Viewing the Workflow History    1  Navigate to the document cover page     9    2  Click Show Workflow History on the left menu     3  Review the following information     The document cover page for uPerform content is located in the Translations area of    the binder     Field  Description              The version number for the document in workflow     Version    Owner    Modified Date  Modified By    The name of the uPerform user who owns the  document     The last time the document was modified     The name of the uPerform user who last modified  the document           ANCILE Solutions     Inc     153    Chapter 7  Using Workflow       Workflow Status The following values are available  Approved   Rejected  and In Process  Approval Setting Displays approved rejected status for the document     Approved by If the document 
108. Pak content library  for example  less than 100  documents   you may want to transform your existing documents to uPerform and  edit the content as necessary  You would then use uPerform to create your website  hierarchy  manage glossary terms  and publish content  Going forward  you would  create all new content with uPerform     O If you have a large Info Pak content library  you may want to use the dual mode  functionality to continue to use Info Pak to maintain your existing Info Pak  documentation that does not require change  Going forward  you would create all new  content in uPerform  You would then publish legacy Info Pak content using Info Pak  and publish uPerform content using the uPerform server  Your end result is a unified  website of Info Pak and uPerform content for your end users     The following diagrams provide an overview of the Migration Wizard dual mode functionality  and the transformation functionality     Dual Mode Functionality    on  Info Pak    I A Glossary  e      Info Pak      Web Architect             Info Pak  Si Cortent Folder  d on Network        Updete ubli sh   as needed             sis      e     uPerformClient   uPerform Documents uPerfonn Website    uP erformServer       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  331    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Tranformation Functionality    ME and Template Profile       estination Folder          332 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Installing and Unins
109. Perform content that has been translated from the original  Translated content retains a link to the  original  In versions prior to 2 1  translated content was referred to as Associated Content     uPerform Document  The XML content produced by uPerform as a result of recording author actions in a target  application  includes the document  simulation  and screenflow views     uPerform Editor  The application used to create  record  and modify documents  simulations  and courses     uPerform Server  The application used to store  manage  and distribute documents  simulation  and courses     User  The consumer of final published content via online help or the website     User Information Source  Allows you to import and synchronize users into uPerform from an external data source     View  A way of displaying content to an author or user  there are four views of uPerform content  available  document  simulation  screenflow  and course     Web Architect  The name of an ANCILE Info Pak application  Web Architect database information can be  imported into uPerform to develop the initial website structure     Website  A collection of performance support materials such as procedures  simulations  and courses that  are available to end users via a web browser     Workspace  The application interfaces available to authors and administrators to provide access to content  creation and management functions        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  365    Glossary of Terms       XML    Extensible M
110. Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        9  Inthe Content area  modify the text within the curly braces     10  Perform one or more of the following options     If You Want To    Modify the format of displayed block   Highlight the text to be formatted     text Click Format     and select from the Edit   Format  or Justify options     Insert an image  table  weblink  orline  Click Format     and select from the Table or  at the cursor location in the displayed   Insert options   block text    Insert a phrase or standard document Click INSERT       PHRASE     or  Standard  property code at the cursor location in   Code     and select from the displayed list   the displayed block text    Determine where the block is used View the This item is used by the items below  area        11  Optionally  edit the source content of the block in the Source pane     Q Basic knowledge of HTML  XML  and Java is required     12  Under Format  select a style from the drop down list   13  Click the checkbox next to Visible to display the block in published documentation     14  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  275    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Specifying New Template Settings  Sections    Specifying Sections  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Sections on the status bar         gt      x       Name       Configuration information  Test Information  ASAP BPP  Exerc
111. Send Notifications    Apply these settings to existing content with retention periods    V ox    cance       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  103    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       4  Complete the following fields     Field     Description   Enable retention periods for this project   Allows Administrator to implement a retention  policy on the current project    Number of days content is valid Sets the number of days until the actions that  follow are triggered     Delete Published Content Removes the expired  published content from the  accessible website    Send Notifications Notifies the author and any subscribers to the  document that the document has expired    Apply these settings to existing content   Updates project content with the updated   with retention periods retention policy        5  Click Save     Q uPerform server retention notifications are executed hourly  Notifications will be  triggered on the next available retention process after the content has expired  That is   content that expires on 6 June  2013 11 48AM will not have notifications sent until  12PM on 6 June 2013 rather than immediately        104 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Transaction Change Notifications    uPerform allows system or project administrators to manually or automatically notify  authors subscribers of changes to your enterprise application  Administrators can enter a list of  changed transaction codes  iView IDs  or scree
112. Server  1  Click  amp sissis  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name     3  Click Document Library        96 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       4  Navigate to the folder containing the file with translated content   5  Click on the content name to go to the binder     6  Scroll to the Translations area of the screen to view the translated documents     Translations    English  United States   en US   Sales  Default     Spanish  Spain   es_ES   Sales ES    7T  Click on the translated document hyperlink to view detailed information about the document     Setting the Default Translation  1  Navigate to the binder that contains the translation     2  Click Set Default Translation in the left menu     Set Default Translation    Set the default translation for this document    English  United States   en US  M    bil Seve  Qc     3  Select the default translation from the drop down list     4  Click Save     Enabling and Disabling Translated Content  1  Click iss  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library     4  Navigate to the folder containing the file with translated content        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  97    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       5  Click on the content name to go to the binder    amp  Sales  uPerform Document     Properties    Last Modified  9 19 07 10 15 AM    Last Modified By  Cindy Brown    Translations    English  United States 
113. USER    SUBJECT   MATTER       Consumes content   EXPERT FEEDBACE   Searches content    Views help online       por  gt   RO es        iz     AUTHOR          ate  D     cid ad content ui  STRIBUTE       REVIEWER         Organizes content  ibrary       2 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 1  Introduction       About This Manual  This manual provides details regarding the administration of content  Information about the  authoring of content is provided in the companion manual Creating Content with ANCILE  uPerform  Information about the technical administration of uPerform  including server    installation and configuration  is provided in the companion manual ANCILE uPerform  Administration     Who Should Read This Manual  This manual includes overview information and step by step procedures for administrators who  manage documentation and training materials delivery to users  Administrators have the following  rights and responsibilities     J Participate in an approval workflow for content    Receive and evaluate feedback from other authors and users    Create the document library and website hierarchies     Create and manage user accounts     Establish project wide settings such as workflow and template usage        ga  ud ud    d    Manage editing rights  a system administrator has editing rights over the entire  uPerform installation  a project administrator has editing rights for one or more  projects within the uPerform installation     In addition  this manual also ref
114. a User Account    When you delete a user  the following actions occur     O The user status is changed to    inactive     and the user is no longer available from the  address book        C  The user is removed from all discussions  roles  and groups  and the user s  subscriptions and notifications are deleted     Click Administration on the left menu    Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   Click Users in the Users  Roles  and Groups area    Enter any part of the user s name into the search field    Click Find    Select the user from the list    Click Delete on the left menu of the server workspace     At the prompt  click OK     Recovering a User Account    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu    Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   Click Users in the Users  Roles and Groups area    Click Deleted Users on the left menu    Select the name of the deleted user     Click Recover User on the left menu     Q Recovered users are not added back into roles nor are they resubscribed to discussions  or notifications        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  35    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Responding to a Request for a User Account  An anonymous user can request an account  This request sends a message to the Help Desk on the  server  The administrator can act on this request to create an account  To expedite the processing  of these account requests  the administrator should subscribe to the Help Desk folder   1  C
115. a related to the questions steps within an  assessment  The value is based on the  performance within the assessment mode of a  simulation  or an assessment inserted into a  course    Interaction ID   The unique identifier of the  interaction    Interaction Time   A timestamp at which the  interaction was completed    Interaction Type   The type of the interaction   Interaction Correct Response   The correct  answer for the interaction    Interaction Student Response   The learner s  response to the interaction    Interaction Result   The success outcome   correct or incorrect wrong    Interaction Description   The description of the          ANCILE Solutions  Inc  265    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Data Element Explanation    interaction  utilized to persist the question stem    in uPerform  In the case of SCORM 1 2  this is a  custom data model element that is utilized by  ANCILE uLearn        Specifying New Template Settings  Styles    Specifying Styles  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Styles on the status bar                 Gores  Propert Phim Publesbons  nr  Docks Sectone Rendy    3  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Enable the use of language specific Select Enable Language Specific Style Fonts   fonts and go to Step 4        Disable the use of language specific Deselect Enable Language Specific Style  fonts Fonts  and go to Step 7        266 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       
116. ample Sections Select Show Example Sections to display the  example sections     Hide Empty Example Select Hide Empty Example Sections to hide  Sections empty example sections  Show Example Sections  must be selected in order to enable this option     Mirror Margins Select Mirror Margins to create booklet style   double sided pages for PDF and Word outputs    Publish Exercise Answers Select Publish Exercise Answers to publish  exercise answers    Insert a page break before Select Insert a page break before each screen shot   each screen shot to insert a break before screen shots     Screen Select minimum and maximum screen heights and  widths   Select Show callouts to display callouts   Q Callouts will only display in  publications containing screen captures   The font  font size  and line thickness of  the callout is not configurable           236 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field  Description                  Margins Select the unit of measurement and specify the  margins for the top  bottom  left  and right pages        Page Size Select common size  unit of measurement and  specify the height and width     5  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Simulation  General Settings    1     2     From the editor  open the new template     Click Publications on the status bar     Select Simulation under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     Select Simulation General Settings from the drop dow
117. and simulations        Outbox Specify the location to which the new uPerform  documents will be saved        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  357    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       12  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Transformation    vy Migration    Step 5  Summary  Please review the follow data before completing the migration  Click Start when ready to begin        Perform Server  https    phtest wduperform com     uPerform Template  Becky Migration Template  udt   Inbox  C  Documents and Settings cbrown My Documents InfoPak parent  Outbox  C  Documents and Settings cbrown My Documents       13  Click Start to begin the transformation process     14  If prompted  click Yes to close all instances of Microsoft Word     Q The transformation progress screen displays the status of the process  To cancel the  process  click Cancel  Stopping the process applies to the current document  but does  not  undo  documents that were already transformed  A confirmation message is  displayed at the end of the transformation run  From this message  you can access a log  of transformation activities during the run     15  Browse to the outbox location you specified for your uPerform documents to review and edit  the documents with the editor     Q When the transformation process is complete  you will be prompted to view the  transformation log  To view the log  click Yes  The transformation Log is stored in the  default locations  In Windows XP  C  Documents and Settings  usernam
118. ansformation log        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  351    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Reviewing the Migration Results    In uPerform  migrated Info Pak documents are displayed with a unique icon  In addition  the Info  Pak document titles include the associated document type within uPerform     Invoicing       Cancel PO Invoice Document  Parent Document            Cancel Single or Collective Invoice  Parent Document        The document type displayed after the title is based on the DocType Name property of the  original Info Pak document     The Migration Wizard automatically verifies content from the uPerform server workspace   Running content verification activates the Info Pak child output on the uPerform server     Q This process may take several minutes after the migration is complete     Optionally  if you want to execute content verification on a regular basis  use Microsoft Windows  Task Scheduler to setup a task on the server to periodically execute the ContentVerification exe  file  Refer to the ANCILE uPerform Administration user manual for instructions on creating tasks  on the server     After migration is complete  perform the following quality assurance and configuration tasks     O Review the document check in log  generated if you have checked documents into  uPerform   This log is located in the following default locations  In Windows XP   C  Documents and Settings   Your Username  VApplication  Data ANCILE uPerform Version X X Logs Batch
119. arkup Language  the source format of uPerform content     XSL  Extensible Stylesheet Language  the file used to control the format of the content displayed in an  XML file        366 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Index    A  accepting   179  suggestions   179  suggestions to become new definition    180  suggestions to replace definition   179  accessing    15  product support center   15  account   13  editing   13  managing    13  account information   13  editing   13  adding   31  85  87  113  116  118  119  129   135  173  181  content from server   129  content to website   118  context to a folder   116  definitions   173  document library   76  document to publish queue   129  LMS   135  managed documents   85  synonym   181  terms   173  user account   31  web documents   87  advanced search   19  20  anonymous access   72  approving documents   149  assigning   32  69  115  137  context   115  project to LMS    137  template to a project   69    user to project   32  author   147  receiving notifications   147  author account   302  Oracle   302  304  325  author discussion   157  viewing   157  author template   211  creating   214  manage locally   216  open   215  properties   224  settings   216  B  binder   79  80  view   80  browsing   79  126  document library   79  glossary   169  website   126  built in properties   224  C  changing owner   89  documents   89  checking in   94  translations   94  collaboration   156  configuration   127  publishing from server 
120. ate User  iView may be configured differently for  Super Administrators and Content Administrators  Therefore  it is important to note  the specific role s  in which an iView portal page is to be modified  If more than one  role applies  then the iView portal page must be edited for all roles     3  Locate the Property Editor panel to the right of the editing area     4  Inthe Property Category list  select Show All     5  In the list of properties  scroll to the URL to Help Topic property        308    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       6     7     Enter the connection profile URL     Click Save     Setting the Help URL Using the PCD Inspector    T     2     10     11     12     13     14     15     Log into SAP Enterprise Portal with Content Administrator permission    From the Portal s top menu  click System Administration    From the System Administration page  click Support    From the Support page Top Level Areas list  click Portal Content Directory     In the Test and Configuration Tools list  click PCD Inspector  You may see warnings at this  point  confirm these warnings and continue     From the PCD Inspector browser  check the box next to portal content   Click Browse Into   Repeat Step 6 7 as necessary until you reach the desired 1View portal page     Select the checkbox next to the desired portal page  and click PropEditor  This will open a  new browser window for the PCD Generic Layer Property Editor     Click Switch to PCM    Fro
121. ate an existing custom property   Select a custom property from the Task pane and  click Duplicate     Select a language from the drop down list   Enter a name    Click OK    Go to Step 5     Delete the selected property Select a custom property from the Task pane and  click Delete     Click Yes   Go to Step 5     Move the property earlier or later in the   Select a custom property from the Task pane and  list  click Move Up or Move Down one or more  times as needed           226 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       5  Select the custom property from the Task Pane   6  Click Modify     7  Perform one of the following options     Q Based on the item selected  some options may not display     If You Want To  Make the property visible to authors Check the Visible checkbox     Make the property translatable Check the Translatable checkbox  This option is  only available if the Visible checkbox is checked  and there are no values assigned to the property    Add values to the property Click Add    Enter a value   Click OK     Modify values to the property Select a value     Click Modify   Edit the text   Click OK   Delete values to the property Select a value   Click Delete   Click Yes   Move the value Select a value     Click Move Up or Move Down one or more  times as needed        8  Click Select Phrase     9  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add   Select a language from the left   Enter the text in
122. ates       If You Want To Then  Move the section later in the list Click Move Down one or more times as needed     Delete a section Select the section   Click Delete     You cannot delete standard publications        9  Review the publication type in the Type field   Q The Type field is not configurable     10  Enter a format name in the Name field     11  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Use default publication settings Select the checkbox next to Use Default  Publication Settings     Create custom publication settings Deselect the checkbox next to Use Default    Publication Settings     Click a publication setting under the selected  publication type     For more information  refer to Setting Default  Publication Settings        12  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        232 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Duplicating  Deleting  and Moving Publication Types  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Publications on the status bar        Manage All Publications             Enabled Sequence Name                ASAP BPP Cue Card  Configuration Information  Course   Course Package   Cue Card   Exercise Data Sheet  Guided Help   Quick Reference  Flow   Quick Reference  Step                          gaga  HA  ar                   4  d  j                                              Sj IS    amp    S   SI  SI  SI   S   S  S   S   S   ST  S TS                                               ca      Gen
123. ation     Assigning a User to a Project Role    Q The minimal uPerform role you should assign to a user interacting with the server from  the client is Author  This ensures the user will have access to server functionality  associated with creating content     1  Click Projects on the upper left     2  Select the project to which the user will be added        32 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       3  Click Edit Properties on the left menu   Edit General Properties    Name  HR Proje    Description     Wi Add Multiple Languages    Y Project Roles     End Users     There are no end users currently assigned to this project   Qai  Authors     There are no authors currently assigned to this project    3 edit    Administrators     There are no administrators currently assigned to this project    a Edit      Project Settings     4  Click Edit below the role to which the user will be assigned     5  Perform one of the following options     Assign project roles manually   Click uPerform Users   Click All Users     Perform a search or click on the first letter of the last name of the  desired user  select the user name  and click Add Selected     Assign a group of users to the   Click uPerform Groups   end user role    Click the checkbox next to the group s  you want to assign to the project  role        6  Click OK     7  Click Save     Finding a User  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administra
124. ation policies such as special characters  spaces   and domains        O Sync a specific segment of a user base in a directory or file source via a filter  and  assign users to groups within uPerform     Four steps are required for synchronizing users     O Create the user information source  which is a connection to a user store  The user  source can be an LDAP compliant directory server  such as Microsoft Active  Directory or a well formed XML file  Multiple user information sources can be  created to allow you to import users into uPerform from different locations  Refer to  the ANCILE uPerform Technical Specifications for a complete list of the supported  directory servers     O Create the filter  which allows you to retrieve a specific set of users from the user  information source and assign the users to a content group  Filters for a directory  server are LDAP queries  filters for XML user sources are XPath queries  Multiple  filters can be created for each user information source     CJ Assign the filter to a group  which allows you to assign access to content within  uPerform  If a filter is not assigned to a group  new users will not be imported to  uPerform and any existing users will be deactivated in uPerform if they are not  included within any other filters  If you are not utilizing group based filtering  the  filter must be assigned to the All Users group     O Run the synchronization from the user information source  filter  or groups page   Alternatively  th
125. attern   Interaction Student Response   cmi interactions n student_response   Interaction Result  cmi interactions n result    Interaction Description   rwd interactions n description     SCORM 2004 Completion Status  cmi completion_status   Success Status  cmi success_status     Lesson Location  cmi location     Suspend Data  cmi suspend_data     Raw Score  cmi score raw    Min Score  cmi score min    Max Score  cmi score max    Scaled Score  cmi score scaled    Session Time  cmi session_time   Interactions  cmi interactions   Interaction ID  cmi interactions n id   Interaction Type  cmi interactions n type     Interaction Correct Response   cmi interactions n correct  responses n pattern     Interaction Student Response   cmi interactions n student response     Interaction Result  cmi interactions n result     Interaction Description   cmi interactions n description     AICC Lesson Location  Core Lesson  Status   Lesson Status  Core Lesson  Location   Suspend Data  Core Lesson   Raw Score  Core Score   Session Time  Core Time     The following table explains the Data Elements     Data Element Explanation    Lesson Status Element utilized to specify the completion status  of the SCO  completed incomplete   This  element can also be utilized to specify the  mastery success of the SCO  passed failed         Completion Status Element utilized to specify the completion status  of the SCO  completed incomplete      The element utilized to specify the mastery of the          264 A
126. automatically publish content when the workflow is completed  or 3  the content is updated from  the Glossary when the option is enabled     For detailed information on creating a regular publishing task  refer to the ANCILE uPerform  Administration user manual     For detailed information on using workflow functionality  refer to Using Workflow  on page 143      Via the publish queue  you can also immediately process one or more documents  For complete  details on the publish queue  refer to Viewing the Publish Queue and History  on page 130      Adding a Document or Folder to the Publish Queue    The following procedure applies to uPerform  managed  and web documents and can be  performed by the publishing administrator     1  Click siss in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name     3  Click Document Library     4  Perform one of the following     If You Want To  Add a folder to the publish queue Navigate to the folder that you want to publish     Add a document to the publish queue   Navigate to the folder in which the document is  located     Click on the document to be added to the queue        5  Click Add to Publish Queue on the left menu     6  Click OK at the confirmation prompt     g If you update a definition in the Glossary  content associated with the definition that  has been previously approved via workflow and published will be automatically sent  back to the publishing queue  This allows you to republish the content with the updated  def
127. background user  interface color  and player primary and secondary  colors from the drop down list  These colors will    display in the published course output     Text Colors Select primary and secondary  and link text colors  from the drop down list  These colors will display in  the published course output     Q Optionally  specify custom colors by clicking Select to the right of list        7  Select from the following options     Enable Transitions Enables a smooth  animated transition from slide to  slide   Reuse existing window Uses the same window when an external link is  launched from the course    Hide audio bar when audio is   Hides the audio bar when audio is not present    not present    Only display one popup ata   If selected  only one popup is displayed at any one  i time    Allow user to give up and fail   Allows the user to quit and fail an assessment   assessment simulations   Base progress on current Shows percent complete based on where the user is   location in the course    Base progress on percentage   Shows percent complete based on how much of the   course a user has completed     256 ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Chapter 11  Using Author Templates          Field  Description                      Allow Image Zooming Specifies if image zooming is allowed and if it is the  default setting     Do not resize Opens the course in the current window size    Screen Choose the width and height for the course display  BEEN isn te  the browser window     Logo S
128. ble from your Info Pak simulation     A Transform Procedure Section must  be enabled to use this option     To transform an Info Pak procedure section from the  simulation  the Info Pak simulation must be in the  same directory as the parent document and the file  name must be the same  Simulations stored in other  directories will not be transformed with the parent  document           344 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       21  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration       Migration    Step 8  Section Mapping  Specify how the Info Pak document sections will be mapped to uPerform document sections     uPerform Sections       Configuration Information   Configuration Information  Exercise Data Sheet   Exercise Data Sheet   Result   Result   Test Information   Test Information   Overview   Purpose       22  Click on a section in the Info Pak Sections window   23  Drag and drop the section on the corresponding section in the uPerform Sections window     24  Review the mapped sections to ensure they are correct     A The Info Pak Overview section has been renamed  Purpose  in uPerform  The procedure  section is not included in the mapping options because the Migration Wizard will  automatically create this section during transformation     Q A section can only be mapped to one other section  Each section has a corresponding  color to easily identify the mapping after the drag and drop operation  The result of the  mapping is displayed
129. bling anonymous  access  refer to Specifying Project Settings  on  page 72         7  Enter a name and description for the required languages in your environment     g From this screen you can also disable multiple language support     8  Click Save     Editing the Displayed uPerform Server Name    Q Editing the displayed uPerform server name allows you to customize what your end  users  authors  and administrators will see when they log onto the uPerform server     1  Click sissi     2  Click Edit Properties on the left menu   Edit General Properties    Name  AcmeCorp_Perform           Description   This s  with    3  Edit the following fields     Field   Description  Name Edit the name for the uPerform server        Enter or edit the description of the uPerform  server     4  Click Save        68 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Working with Templates    uPerform server offers several options when working with templates     O Assign a template to a project    Version a template       o     Roll back to a previous version  o    Republish documents from an updated template    Assigning a Template to a Project    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu    Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click uPerform Templates in the Server Administration area    Click on the name of the template to be assigned to the project    Click Assign Template on the left menu    Select the checkbox next to the desired p
130. blish this document when the workflow process finishes   approval group option only                  v  Allow approvers with Editor rights to replace the document  or add new versions  during the approval process        bil Save  EQ cancel    3  Select one of the following options to specify approvers     Use selected approval group   To use a predefined workflow  select the name     Use individual approvers To create an ad hoc list of reviewers  click  added below uPerform Users and select the users     Use the up and down arrows to set the sequence of  reviewers in the approval process     This option always displays for an administrator   This option displays for an author only if the project  administrator has enabled ad hoc workflow  functionality on the project        4  To publish the document when the predefined or ad hoc workflow process is complete  select  the Automatically publish this document when the workflow process finishes   approval  group option only  checkbox     5  To enable versioning in workflow  select the Allow approvers with Editor rights to replace  the document  or add new versions  during the approval process checkbox     6  Click Save     7T  Click OK on the confirmation page        146 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Using Workflow Notifications    The uPerform workflow functionality includes email notifications to inform reviewers of  workflow tasks and to inform authors when the workflow has been completed  These 
131. c  15    Chapter 2  Getting Started          Exiting    You do not need to logout of the uPerform server  However  if you have multiple uPerform web  browser windows open  closing a single browser window only ends the session for that window   You must close all open instances of your supported web browser in order to log out of the  uPerform server        16 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server  Workspace    The ANCILE uPerform server workspace is available to both authors  and administrators via a supported web browser        Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace          Introduction to the uPerform Server Workspace    The server workspace allows authors to    O Manage personal account information   O Create favorites and subscribe to content   O Review and approve a list of content within a workflow  O Create and participate in workflow    CJ Participate in collaboration discussions       CJ Assign content to website contexts   In addition  the following specific administrator functionality is provided   O Create and update projects  document libraries  and websites  O Import a document library structure   O Create and manage users  roles  and groups   O Configure glossary and publishing settings   O Create and manage workflows    O Configure settings for a Learning Management System  LMS  to be used in  conjunction with eLearning courses       O Generate reports    Administrators can also customize the end user website  For more information  refe
132. ck Browse     and navigate to the file you want to  import     Definition Conflict From the drop down list  select Replace Existing  Resolution Definitions  Add As Suggestion  or Skip  Definition        7  Click Save     Viewing and Deleting the Imported Glossary or Translation  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area     4  Click Import on the left menu     LJ Import Actions    Import Name Type Date Started Status       Acme Glossary Import Definitions 3 16 08 1 08 PM Details   Delete                Acme Translations Import Translations 9 16 08 1 09 PM Details Delete       5  Perform one of the following options   If You Want To    View the imported glossary or Click Details   translation details    Delete an imported glossary or Click Delete     translation Q You can only delete an imported  glossary or translation once the  import process is complete        Exporting a Glossary  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  193    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area   4  Click Export on the left menu     5  Click Export Glossary on the left menu     Export Glossary    Export Name     Source Language    English  United States  s        v  Export Default Language         
133. ckbox to display  the Steps window to users during simulation  playback     Select the height of the published step window     Select the width of the published step window     Dock on startup Select Dock on startup checkbox to set the dock  position on startup     Select a dock position of right or left     12  For Action Defaults  complete the following fields     Field  Description                Border color Select the color of the hotspot border        Optionally  specify custom colors by clicking Select  to the right of the color drop down list     Select the size of the hotspot border   Flashing Select the checkbox next to Flashing to enable  flashing hotspots     13  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        Q For more information on simulation output modes  refer to    Viewing Simulations  in  the companion manual  Creating Content with ANCILE uPerform     Default Publication Settings  Simulation  User Interface Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Simulation under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        240 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Simulation User Interface Settings from the drop down list     Sendaton Pian Satira  Seruttton User interface Settings    Sure       Default  Preview          5  Select a skin from the Skins drop down list     Q A preview of the skin selection will display in the Preview window     6  Complete the
134. cked into uPerform except as part of a  zip file for an Info Pak document     Info Pak documents that were not imported into Web Architect will not be included in the  uPerform document library structure  However  the Migration Wizard will still detect these files if  they are in the parent folder and will upload them directly to the root of the project  You must use  uPerform to move these files to the correct location in the document library     Prior to executing the migration  review the following important points regarding checking Info  Pak content into uPerform     CJ Only Info Pak content published to a filename can be migrated  If you are publishing  Info Pak content to ID or ID filename  this content cannot be migrated        O Documents can only be checked into each uPerform server once  If you check  documents into the document library of a different project on the server  the migration  process will simply increment the version of the documents in the original document  library     A global cascading stylesheet  CSS  file is used to control the appearance of Info Pak documents  on the uPerform website  This css file is stored on the uPerform application server at  WWW RWDtPerform01 style  If you made customizations to your Info Pak stylesheet   content css   you must repeat those customizations in the InfoPakContent css file  All Info Pak  documents linked to from uPerform will use the InfoPakContent css  you cannot specify a local       336    ANCILE Solutions  
135. content development  delivery  and management environment  From  recording and editing functionality through secure check in  check out   workflow  and website deployment  ANCILE uPerform expedites your  development and delivery of training materials        Chapier 1  Introduction          What is ANCILE uPerform     The ANCILE uPerform application is a content development and delivery tool designed to enable  authors and administrators to create  manage  and distribute documents  simulations  and  eLearning courses  Specifically  ANCILE uPerform allows authors and content administrators to   O Create  edit  and manage content    O Collaborate within the authoring team to review content and share information    CJ Incorporate content in an electronic performance support system  EPSS  website and  online help    CJ Solicit and receive feedback from users       C  Deliver content personalization features such as subscriptions and favorites to authors  and users    To manage content  authors and administrators can leverage check in checkout  versioning   workflow  and collaboration functionality  Users can access content via a standard web browser or  mobile device  provide feedback to authors  and collaborate with other users to share knowledge     The ANCILE uPerform application consists of two parts     O Editor  used to record  create  and edit content         J Server  used to configure and manage the document library  website  glossary  and  workflow functionality     END 
136. created in the Portal Content Studio  Because identifiers are unique  they can be used as reliable   links between an iView portal page and its related help content     To link an iView or portal page to help content  the iView portal page ID must be included in the  properties of the applicable uPerform document s   To allow authors to easily locate an  iView portal page   s ID  the Details option must be enabled  An author can determine the  iView portal page ID via its details window by selecting the Details option within SAP EP  This  will display a new browser window containing the Portal Component and Object ID     The Object ID is a string of alphanumeric characters  You may choose to use the entire Object ID  as the iView portal page ID  or simply use the segment of the Object ID that follows the last      divider     Including the iView Portal Page ID in Documents    ANCILE uPerform allows the author to populate properties within the document  The uPerform  server uses these properties to produce search results  For transaction based SAP procedures  the  author can specify the SAP transaction code s  to which the document applies  The author can  specify an iView portal page ID  instead of a transaction code  uPerform provide a Properties  window for populating the Transaction Code s  property within the document        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  307    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Setting the Help URL for an iView Portal Page    The URL to Help Topic propert
137. ct Course Page Settings from the drop down list        5  Complete the following fields     Field  Description O    Mirror Margins Select Mirror Margins to create booklet style   double sided pages for PDF and Word publication    Show audio transcript Select Show audio transcript to display the audio  transcript in published courses     Show assessment section Select Show assessment section to display the  assessment section in a published course    Show answers Select Show answers to display assessment  answers    Show course links Select Show course links to display links when you  publish a course to Word or PDF format           260    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description          Select Course Header  Student Guide Header   Header  Course Footer  Student Guide Footer  or  Footer from the drop down list to select the header     Footer Select Course Footer  Student Guide Footer   Footer  Course Header  Student Guide Header   or Header from the drop down list to select the  footer     Margins Specify margins for Top  Bottom  Left  and Right   Optionally  select the unit of measurement from the  Unit drop down box    Page Size Specify the common sizes  height  width  and unit of  measurement     7  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        Default Publication Settings  Course  Mobile Device Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar 
138. d   relate   the search will also find documents  emails  discussion topics  and folders with the word   related      In addition  skip links are available when a screen reader is being used in conjunction with  uPerform or when you are using keyboard navigation  Skip links allow you to skip to the main  content on the page or to the left menu        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  19    Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       Executing a Search    The following is a partial list of the file formats indexed by uPerform     g    m     g    m        g    Microsoft Office formats   Adobe Acrobat  pdf format   HTML formats  including  htm and  html  XML formats  including  xml   xsd  and  xsl    ASCII  txt format    Exact match searches must be enclosed in quotation marks  For example   Entering a timesheet    In addition  you can search for content containing Boolean operators  such as AND  OR  and  NOT  In Boolean searches  phrases with spaces must be contained in parentheses      For Example   transaction code  AND  last modified      A An exact match search  search text enclosed in quotations marks  and a Boolean search   search text with boolean keywords AND  NOT  OR  cannot be executed at the same  time  A single search can only be an exact match or a Boolean search     1  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Perform a basic search In the top banner  enter a word or words in the    Search textbox     Click Go to display the Search Results window     Go 
139. d Groups       4  Select the folder that contains the group filter you want to delete   5  Select the content for which you would like to delete a group filter     6  Click Assign Group Filter in the left navigation bar     Assign Group Filter    Please drag the documents on the right to the group name it should be assigned to on the left  Documents can be assigned to multiple groups  but  each group can only have one document assignment     Content Groups Related Documents    El  Acme Corporation All Users Sales Timesheet     Administrative Group  HR Group    Sales Group   Sales Timesheet      Save   C3 cancel    7  Scroll over the name of the content in the Content Groups list     Content Groups    E  Acme Corporation All Users  Administrative Group  HR Group    Sales Group   Sales Timesheet Delete    J Save     3 cancel    8  Click Delete     9  Click Save        62 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document  Library    Folders and content are stored in the document library on the ANCILE  uPerform server  The document library allows the administrator to  establish a meaningful folder hierarchy within a project  Authors  in  turn  check content into these folders     From the document library  authors and administrators can view  document properties  add managed documents  and view document  context and version history  The document library also provides  centralized storage of all discussions        63    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library    
140. d down arrow buttons to  re order the list of properties in the Properties Selected list     A You must select at least one property        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  343    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       18  Optionally  click Preview to view the document library     19  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration       Migration    Step 7  Transformation Settings  Specify how the Info Pak documents will be transformed into uPerform documents        Automatically Generate Exercise Section                Transform Procedure Section           v  Transform Procedure from Simulation if available                20  Complete the following     Q These settings will update your template with the necessary Info Pak properties and  allow you to map sections for transformation     Field  Description               00 0     Automatically Generate Select this option to automatically update the  Exercise Section exercise section in the uPerform document after  transformation     Transform Procedure Section   Select this option to transform the procedure section  from your Info Pak document into a uPerform  document     This option determines if the procedure  section in the new uPerform document  should be populated based on the Info   A Pak simulation or document  If this  option is disabled  new uPerform  documents will not contain any content  in the procedure section     Transform Procedure from Select this option to transform the procedure section  Simulation if availa
141. d from every website it is linked to  Please  make sure that you are not accidentally deleting linked Info Pak content     Note About Retrieving Deleted Content     Throughout the uPerform System there is options to remove items  While inside a project  deleted items are sent to a project level recycle  bin  This type of functionality does not exist for deleting projects  There is no Recycle Bin for projects  There is no option  method  or way  to restore any information deleted during this process  While methods for deleted content may exist  all information will be removed from  the server in ALL forms   This includes published content     Are you sure you will NEVER need to restore this project or any of its data     Time Considerations    Due to the size and complexity of projects  the removal process may take several minutes to complete  Also  to prevent any errors  completing the delete  please ensure the following      Are there any users currently accessing project content    gt  Are there any items currently in the Publishing Queue     If you answer  yes  to any of those questions  you should not delete     v Delete it already      3 Cancel       Click Delete it already         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  75    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Populating the Document Library    After you have created the project  you are ready to create and populate  or import  the document  library with a folder hierarchy     Manually Adding a Folder to the Document 
142. data is not imported  from a directory server     Creating a Group  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click Groups under Users  Roles and Groups   58 Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group  Content Groups  ELANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users    Bl Group 2       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  55    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       4  Click on the root group in the tree view     Q You can create a subgroup by clicking on any group within the tree view     5g Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group   Content Groups Selected Group    EJ ANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users    Name  Group 1  E Description   Group 2  Users  o  Groups  o    Applied Filters     add   T Edit    ge Delete     i view users    5  Click Add     Edit Content Group    Location  ANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users  e     Name  Group 1    Description     Manual Users     Applied Filters     M ox cance    6  Complete the following fields   Field  Description      Name Enter a name for the group   Description Enter a description for the group     T  To add users to the group  click uPerform Users        8  Click All Users     9  Click on the letter of the last name s  of  or search for  the user s  you want to add to the  group     10  Select the user s  from the list   11  Click Add Selected     12  Click OK        56    ANCILE Solutio
143. ders  you have created     Assign Website Context to Human Resources    EFE  e Website  Expand All        Human Resources             Current Contexts    No contexts have been selected     Z Save   EJ cancel    6  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To  Expand all items in the tree view Click Expand All        Collapse all items in the tree view Click Collapse All     7  Click   to the left of the folder name to navigate to the desired folder s      8  Click the checkbox to the left of one or more folders to create contexts in the website  folder s      9  Click Save    amp  HR Timesheets  uPerform Binder     Properties   Last Modified      3 24 08 2 20 PM  Last Modified By  John Doe  Translations    English  United States   en US      amp  Time        French  France   fr FR   HR  Time     Group Assignments    No group filters applied    Document Library Context    RWD uPerform Workspace  gt  Acme ERP  gt  Document Library  gt  HR  Timesheets        lorkspace  gt  Acme ERP  gt  Website  gt  HR  Timeshe          Related Documents    10  Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 to create additional context links from documents and document  library folders to website folders        116 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Viewing Website Context    1     2     Click  esissts in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Document Library     Navigate to the folder or document for which you would like to view the context 
144. e  Application  Data ANCILE Migration Wizard Version X X Logs Transformation  and in Windows  Vista and Windows 7  C  Users App Data Roaming ANCILE Migration  Wizard VersionX X Logs Transformation     16  Edit the document s  using the procedures and information found in Reviewing and Editing  Transformed Info Pak Documents  see  Reviewing and Editing Transformed Documents and    Simulations  on page 360         358 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Transforming a Single Info Pak Document or Simulation    Q  You can transform a single Info Pak document or simulation using the uPerform client   Single document transformation can be performed in connected or disconnected mode   If you are working in disconnected mode  ensure you have a local template containing  Info Pak transformation properties     Q For information on best practices in planning and executing the transformation  refer to  the Transitioning from ANCILE Info Pak to ANCILE uPerform white paper on the  ANCILE Product Support Center at https   products ancile com     1  Open the uPerform client    2  Select FILE  gt  OPEN    3  Change File of types to Info Pak Document or Info Pak Simulation   4  Navigate to the Info Pak file    5  Click OK     6  Select a template from the list     Q Only those templates containing Info Pak properties needed to perform a  transformation are displayed  For more information  refer to Migrating Info Pak  Documents to the uPerform Document Lib
145. e Languages Click Add Multiple Languages     Enable multi language Select a default language from the drop down list   support to set a name and  This language will be displayed if the name or  description of the website description in the end user s language is not  folder for any of the available      supported languages  This Click Enable   language specific name and    description will display based  on the language preference  set in the end user s account     Go to Step 7     Language Filter Select Filtered to display the content in the end  user s language     or    Select a language from the drop down list to display  content only in the selected language     Go to Step 8        114    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       7  As needed  enter a name and description for the languages listed     Q From this screen you can also disable multiple language support     8  Click Save     Deleting a Website Folder  1  Click sissies in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Website   4  Navigate to the desired folder     5  Click Delete Folder on the left menu     A Deleting a folder will send the folder to the recycle bin  The documents will remain in  the document library folder  For detailed information on managing the recycle bin   refer to Managing the Recycle Bin  on page 108      6  Click OK at the confirmation prompt     Assigning a Website Context to Document Library Content    When you assign a website con
146. e Messages on the left menu     To delete     1  Which items to remove         select or unselect all                 Page 2 Correction       2  Confirm    Removing the selected items will remove them from this Author Discussion  If items are present in other contexts  as indicated by      then they will continue to exist in those other contexts     Removing folders vill delete all of their items if they exist in a single context  as will removing messages with attachments or other  objects with items under them     V ex  cance    5  Select the checkbox es  of the message s  to delete or  optionally  click Select All   6  Click OK to confirm your selection s      7  Click OK to delete your selection s         162 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Using the Tell Others Feature    You can use the Tell Others feature to send an email containing a link to a particular object within  the uPerform server  A Tell Others link can be sent to one or more uPerform users     The email message you send is customizable and contains a link to the item of interest to provide  quick and easy access     Creating a Tell Others Notification    1  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Click Tell Others on the left menu     Tell Others    To   separate multiple email addresses with commas     An email mess      Perom    Copy yourself 
147. e are able to intercept and redirect help calls made from this Help link     Q Refer to the appropriate instructions and SAP Note s  for changing JavaScript files via  the ABAP Workbench     To modify the Workplace Integration API   1  Loginto the appropriate SAP System using SAP GUI   2  Open the ABAP Workbench Object Navigator using transaction SE80     3  In the Object Navigator  select the Internet Service BBPGLOBAL  The Web Application  Builder is started     4  Select WPINTEGRATION JS from the Mime Objects located under the BBPGLOBAL item  in the Object list        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  311    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       5  Right click WPINTEGRATION JS and select Change   6  If prompted  click the green check    T  If prompted  click Maint  in logon lang    8  Click Save As Local File     9  Create a backup copy of the wpintegration js file  e g   wpintegration js bak  on your local  computer     10  In the Web Application Builder  scroll to the bottom of the wpintegration js file   11  Append the Help Launchpad code supplement to the end of the wpintegration js file     12  In the code supplement  locate and edit the following fields     Field  Description        HELP SERVER  LOCATION Eneter the connection profile URL    HELP FALLBACK  LOCATION   Location of the fallback help  in case a scripting  error occurs during context sensitive help     Q The fallback help does not  automatically redirect the user to a  given website when there is a help  page that
148. e checkbox es  nest to the item s  you want to delete     7T  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  109    Chapter 6  Working With the Website    In addition to the document library view of content on the ANCILE  uPerform server  there is also a website view of content  This view  allows you to organize help content in a meaningful way for your end  users     Publishing is also an important part of working with the website   Publishing allows you to display final content on the website  as well  as publish courses to a Learning Management System  LMS         111    Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Introduction to the Website    The document library is structured in a logical fashion for your authors  For example  your  document library might be organized by enterprise module  However  your end users might find it  easier to locate content stored by function or role  for example  sales order processing or sales  clerk   The website view in uPerform allows you to establish this user friendly organization of  content and addresses the question   What s the best way for end users to locate on the job help      uPerform provides two methods for creating a website hierarchy     CJ Building the website via context assignment   This method allows you to manually  populate the website by assigning context to document library content  This method is  well suited for a small end user population and a small number of documents     O Building the website via dynamic website f
149. e help  will display    Height The height of the browser window in which the help  will display    Location The location of the browser window in which the  help will display     This option allows the browser window containing  help to display on top of all open applications  This    Stay On Top  IE Only     8  Click Edit Settings     option is available only for use with Internet    Explorer     Edit Settings    Name  Orade 12 Con    Description     Application       Orade 12    Base Help URL  http   a  korapp dev4000 rwdtech com 8001 OA_HTML        v       Browser Settings  Width  40  Height  80    Location   Right v       Stay On Top  IE Only              M Seve    cance    9  Edit review the following fields     Field     Description  Enter the name of the connection profile     Description    Application    Enter details describing the profile   Select the application from the drop down list           300    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Field  Description                     Base Help URL    Search Method    Enter the URL of the help provided by the  application     Example  http    servername   path    This option is available only for the Web  application  Select Transaction Code to search by  transaction code  Full Text  All Words  to search to  return results based on properties  or Full Text  Any  Words  to search to return results based on  properties  as well as words provided in the  document     Width Set the width of the b
150. e in order to have the web document display on the  website  This final step in the development process allows you to maintain access control to your    web documents  Web documents are immediately displayed on the website after being added to  the publish queue     Enabling Conversion Types for uPerform and Managed Documents  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  127    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       3  Click Publishing in the Server Administration area     7     Publishing Configuration  These configuration settings control the available published output formats for all documents published on the server   uPerform Course    wj PDF V  HTML V  Word  uPerform Document   y  PDF V  Simulation  V  HTML y  PPT V  Word  Word Documents   doc    y  PDF V  Source y HTML  Word Documents   docx     y  PoF V  Source y  HTML  Excel Documents   xls    y  PDF V  Source  Excel Documents   xIsx    yj PDF V  Source  PowerPoint Documents   ppt    y  PDF V  Source  PowerPoint Documents   pptx       Source    4  Select one or more of the following conversion types to enable     Q You must have at least one conversion type selected in order to publish content     Field  Description                 Enable a uPerform course to   Select the checkbox es  in the uPerform Course area  convert to PDF  HTML  or to enable conversion to PDF  HTML  or Word   Word    Enable a uPerf
151. e library is empty and  that any content related to the library is deleted from the recycle bin     Import Document Library Structure       Source XML File  Browse     Document Library Structure Root XPath   Document Library Folder XPath   Folder Name XPath     Folder Description XPath     4  Complete the following fields     Field     jDescripion                         Source XML file Click Browse     and locate the XML file  containing the document library structure you  want to import     Document Library Structure Root Specify an XPath query representing the root s   XPath of the Document Library structure     Document Library Folder XPath Specify an XPath query representing a Document  Library folder  This is only searched from  beneath the Document Library Structure Root  XPath     Folder Name XPath Specify an XPath query representing the name of  a Document Library folder  This is expected to  be an attribute or sub element of a node found by  the Document Library Folder XPath           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  77    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library    Field  Description           Folder Description XPath  Optional  Specify an XPath query representing  the description of a Document Library Folder        This is expected to be an attribute or sub element  of a node found by the Document Library Folder  XPath        5  Click Save     6  Click OK when the import is complete        78 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library        
152. e synchronization can be scheduled to run automatically  For more  information on scheduling tasks  refer to  Scheduling Automated Tasks  in the  companion manual ANCILE uPerform Administration        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  37    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Working with User Information Sources    Adding a User Information Source from a Directory Server    1     2     9     Click Administration on the left menu    Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area    Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   Click Add User Source on the left menu    Enter a name for the source in the Name field    Enter a description of the source in the Description field    Select Directory Server from the source drop down list     Click Next     Create a New User Information Source    LDAP   acmeds com 389                Field Mapping                J  Enable Automatic Synchronization    Send Account Created Notifications    Complete the following required fields     Field  Description        Location Enter the URL for the directory server  For  example  LDAP   acmeDS com 389       Page Size Enter the number of records to retrieve at one  time  If your director server supports page size  limits  ensure your page size is within that range   If the directory server does not use paging  enter        A Page size should not be set if the  directory server does not provide an  estimated number of results        38    ANCILE Solutions  Inc 
153. e template selected in  the Template drop down list        Please select the columns you want in the report     Available Columns    Cr 2    Logical Object Identifier  LOID     File Name   File Size   Document Type  L       elete   Context Name   Context OID   Context URL   Document Library Context  Website Contexts    Selected Columns    Document Type  File Name         Previous      next    E9 cance       ANCILE Solutions  Inc     207    Chapter 10  Using Reports       6  Select a field from the Available Columns listbox   Q If you want to generate a report for usage statistics  select Hit Count  Hit Count Reset  On  and or Hit Count Reset By     Custom template properties are noted with an asterisk  For example  Transaction  Code s      7  Click the right arrow to move the field into the Selected Columns list box    8  Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to add additional fields to the report    9  Optionally  click the left arrow to remove fields from the Selected Columns list   10  Click the up and down arrows to reorder fields in the Selected Columns list     11  Click Next     Edit Report    Please create the filter for this report  Each filter condition added will narrow the scope of this report   Add Filter Condition    Field Name Condition    Variable    Document Content or Title        Contains Any w     Fixed  Current Filter    Field Name Condition Value       Project Is  Project  R Delete    12  Select a field name from the Field Name drop down list     13  Select a condition f
154. ect the All available contexts radio button   definitions to folders in the document   This option is not available if the Info Pak    library Glossary is based on language     Ensure that all Info Pak   Glossary Select the Import definitions without context   definitions are added to uPerform  but   as suggestions checkbox    you have no key properties that match   The Info Pak   Glossary key property definition   document library folders that does not match a context in uPerform will be  added as a suggestion at the project level        A If your Info Pak   Glossary key property is not language  you must select the uPerform  language that should be used for the Info Pak   Glossary definitions     30  Click Next        346 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       31  Review the summary list     32  Click Start to begin the migration process     Q Microsoft Word should not be used until the migration process is complete  During the  migration process  the screen displays the percent complete status of the process  To  cancel the process  click Stop  Stopping the process applies to the document check in  process and Glossary processing  but does not  undo  documents that were already  checked in  A confirmation and status message is displayed at the end of the migration  run  From this message  you can access a log of migration activities during the run     33  If you want to transform your Info Pak documents to uPerform documents  refer to  T
155. ed fields     Field  Description    O Z oO o oo    O    User ID Enter the user s account identification   Ligatures are not supported  For example        First Name Enter the user s first name   pre  lamers Regem  Last Name Enter the user s last name   pre llamar Remmi          ANCILE Solutions  Inc  31    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Field  Description O Z oO ooo    O    Password Enter the user s password     The password cannot be blank  Only US ASCII characters 32 126 are  allowed  Double byte characters are not supported     Password Confirmation Re enter the new password to confirm your entry     Time Zone Select the user s time zone from the drop down list     Language Select the desired interface language from the drop down list     For an end user account  this will also set the user s language for use in  content filtering of website documents based on language     Email Address Enter the user s email address     6  Click Save        Q When the user account is created  the user is automatically assigned to the All Users  group within uPerform     A manually created user will receive an email from the administrator  This email  contains the user s ID and password  The user can log into the server to change the first  and last name  the password  update the email address  and specify the local time zone  and preferred locale  To customize the email notification  refer to    Working with  Phrases    in the companion manual ANCILE uPerform Administr
156. ed in the publish  processing     Date Started Lists the date and time the publish process was  started    Date Completed Lists the date and time the publish process was  completed     ANCILE Solutions  Inc  131          Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Outcome Lists the success or failure status of the publishing  process        Formats Lists the number of formats processed during the  publish activity   You can click on this hyperlinked number to review  the format details     T  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the history list     8  Optionally  click Refresh Queue to refresh the list     9  Optionally  click View Different Date to view documents published on other dates     Republishing Documents    Q Use this procedure to republish updated uPerform  managed  and web documents     associated with an updated template  It is not necessary to republish documents that are  up to date     1  Click Administration on the left menu    2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area    3  Click uPerform Templates in the Server Administration area   4  Select a template from the list     5  Click Republish on the left menu     Republish    Are you sure you want to add all content created with ERP_Template udt to the publishing queue               v  Only add documents with an  approved  status           132 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       6  Perform one or more of the following options     If You Want T
157. ed on the users language preferences  as set in My Account       gt  Before you enable multi language support you must specify a default language  This language vill be displayed if the users  language is not  available    To enable multi language support  select a default language and click the  enable  button below       English  United States   en Us  v     V Enable     3 Cancel    9  Select a default language from the drop down list     10  Click Enable     Create a New Dynamic Website Folder    This wizard allows you to create a dynamic website folder that searches for documents based on specified filter conditions       Language Specific Properties   Name  Description     English  United States   en US   Acme HR Training  Chinese  China   zh_CN   German  Germany   de DE   Spanish  Spain   es ES   French  France   fr FR     Default Language  J    English  United States   en US        Disable Multiple Languages    Language Filter    Filtered v       Next  EY Cancel       120 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       11  Complete the following fields     Q Languages are generated based on the locales specified by the system administrator     Fed      Bescription    Description Enter amplifying information about the folder     Default Language Optionally  change the default language for the  folder     12  Select a language filter from the drop down list        13  Click Next     Create a New Dynamic Website Folder    Please select the template tha
158. ed only to the bottom  Only   HTML Only border     13  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        Modifying  Duplicating  and Deleting Styles  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Styles on the status bar     3  Click Manage All Styles from the task pane     He Edt Wee Format Toss Heip Debug  sene s       Marape A Ses        Erat Language Spec Spe Fores        Acton Nee Sue  immer Now          Gores  Properties Phim Pubicasers  in  Docks Sectone Panty    4  Select a style from the editor pane        270 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       5  Choose from one of the following options           Modify the selected style m Click Modify  and refer to Specifying Styles  on  page 266     Duplicate the style Click Duplicate    The duplicated style is added below the original    a To Z  BH n      style  Modify the property to specify a new name  and characteristics  For more information  refer  to Specifying Styles  on page 266      6  Click FILE    SAVE to save the template     Viewing Styles  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Styles on the status bar     3  Click Applied Styles from the task pane           Garand Pepe Peres Puscstens  Bir  fioc Sectors eir    Q A list of styles and their descriptions is displayed in the Editor Pane        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  271    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Changing Bulk Styles    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Styles on the status bar   
159. ed with Active Server   To disable an LMS   Select the No radio button associated with Active Server     Click Save           138    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Viewing the End User Website    From your My Projects list on your personal page you can access both the document library and  the end user website views of the project  To display the end user website view of your project     click   to the right of the project name in the My Projects list and navigate to the desired  website folder        My Projects  ABC Project f       You can also view the end user website via the View as End User link on the left menu  which is  available from website folders  documents  and projects        Actions          When the website is displayed  end users who are logged in can toggle between viewing all help  content  Show AII Help Documents   viewing just the help content applicable to the specified  language  Show Filtered Documents   or viewing content that has been related to the content  displayed  Show Related Documents   In addition  an anonymous end user can select a language  that they want the uPerform server to display     Training Folder    Areas  None    Help Content      Show Filtered Documents   v         Show Filtered Documents  Course Training Show All Help Documents  Show Related Documents     gt         gt Timesheet    Context  Collaboration Group Memory  gt  AcmeCorp Project  gt  Training Folder       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  
160. eive your subscription  Personal Page  notification in the My Alerts section of your  uPerform personal page        Send notifications in an email   Select this option to receive your subscription  report to  your email notification via email message   address      Specify one of the following email notification  types  daily  weekly  or immediately after an event        5  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  187    Chapier 9  Working with the Glossary          Tracking Term and Definition Usage    The following glossary reports are available to allow you to report on term usage and undefined or  unused terms     O Term Usage  Displays documents that include a particular term     O Undefined Terms  Displays terms found during globalization that do not have a  definition or an assigned context     O Unused Terms  Displays terms that are not used in any globalized document        O Term Summary by Project  Displays terms used in all projects in the uPerform  instance     In addition  from the Globalization History list  you can click on a View All New Terms or View    All Undefined Terms hyperlink to view a summary of all new terms and all undefined terms  from the current day     Viewing Term Usage  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Enter the term in the Find Term field   3  Click Search   4  Click View Term Usage on the left menu     5  Review the following information     Field  Description                    Document Hyperlinked title of the
161. elect HELP  gt  REQUEST HELP FROM ANCILE UPERFORM to  confirm the help link has been properly installed        324 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Providing Help to End Users    If anonymous access has not been enabled for the project containing the requested help content   the end user will have to login to the uPerform server when requesting help  This login  requirement can be avoided by enabling Single Sign On  Refer to the companion manual   ANCILE uPerform Administration  for detailed information on enabling Single Sign On     For detailed instructions on enabling anonymous access for a project  refer to Enabling Project  Settings     Requesting Help  1  Log into the application as an end user   2  Navigate to the desired screen     3  Perform one of the following options    If You Want To    View context sensitive help for Oracle   Click the help icon for a screen   E Business  SAP CRM Web Client Go to Step 4    2007  SAP Portal  Siebel 8  or   PeopleSoft 9    View context sensitive help for Generic   Click the Request Context Sensitive Help  toolbar button  or select HELP  gt  REQUEST  CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP   Go to Step 4   Context sensitive help can be    accessed from the right click context  menu in Internet Explorer     Modify server URL for Generic CSH   Click the Request Context Sensitive Help  plug in toolbar button  or select HELP  gt  ANCILE  UPERFORM HELP SETTINGS       Enter a URL in the UPERFORM SERVER  URL  field    
162. elect a logo to display in the published course and    on the website     Logos are managed in the Image area of the  template editor  For more information on images   refer to Specifying General Settings  Images  on  page 218      Resize and center window Opens the course at the size specified by the screen  width and height  and centers the course window     Hotspot Interaction Select a stamp to indicate a hotspot in a course   Select a color for the hotspot     8  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course  LMS Settings    1     2     5     From the editor  open the new template   Click Publications on the status bar   Select Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     Select Course LMS Settings from the drop down list            Cosse LMS Settings  Package    3  Crente package  E  Show answers  Enable remote proxy support    Complete the following fields        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  257    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field  Description            0    Create package Click the Create Package checkbox to create  SCORM conformant or AICC conformant output  for integration with a Learning Management System   LMS      Show answers Click the Show Answers button to display the  answer at the end of the course     Enable remote proxy support   Only select the Enable Remote Proxy Support  checkbox if you are instructed to do so by ANCILE  Product Support     Display username prompt Select this option to disp
163. en modified  the uPerform client displays a message identifying the conflicted  skin state and provides the option to cancel the skin package download process  If you  continue to extract the skin to the  uPerform installation  Client appdata skins  Course  or Sim  custom folder  it will overwrite the existing skin  If the local skin is older than  the version on the server  it will be overwritten automatically     2  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Import a custom skin    Deploy a custom skin    Click Import        Navigate to the  uskin file on your local computer  and click Open     Click OK   Select a skin from the list   Click Export       Q Deployed custom skins have a  uskin  file extension           288    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files       3     if You Want To    Delete a custom skin Select a skin from the list     Click Remove      Click Yes   Q If the skin is saved on the server  it    will re display the next time you  access the Manage Local Custom  Skins window     Check in a custom skin Select a skin from the list   Click Check In   Click OK        Click Close     Rolling Back to a Previous Version of a Custom Skin    1     2     Click  amp sises  in the uPerform server workspace    Click on the project name    Click Document Library    Select the folder containing the custom skin    Click on the name of the binder containing the skin you want to view     In the Translations section 
164. ent           350 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       13  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration     Migration    Step 8  Section Mapping  Specify how the Info Pak document sections will be mapped to uPerform document sections     Info Pak Sections uPerform Sections   set et   pcm  EROR ic i       Result      Mapped Sections   ASAP BPP   ASAP BPP   Configuration Information   Configuration Information  Exercise Data Sheet   Exercise Data Sheet   Result   Result   Test Information   Test Information   Overview   Purpose    pm peius       14  Click on a section in the Info Pak Sections window     15  Drag and drop the section on a corresponding section in the uPerform Sections window     16  Review the mapped sections to ensure they are correct     A The Info Pak Overview section has been renamed  Purpose  in uPerform  The procedure  section is not included in the mapping options because the Migration Wizard will  automatically create this section during transformation     Q A section can only be mapped to one other section  Each section has a corresponding  color to easily identify the mapping after the drag and drop operation  The result of the  mapping is displayed in the Mapped Sections list  To remove a mapping  click on the  mapping in the Mapped Sections list and click Remove     17  Click Next     18  Review the summary information     19  Click Start     Q When the template update is complete  you can choose to view the tr
165. ent and check this new document into the same binder as long as French  content does not already exist  When the original US content is changed  both the author of the  UK translated content and the French content will receive notification of the change and can then  review the translated content to potentially incorporate changes  In addition  you can enable and  disable a translation for display on the end user website     When you check a translated document into the server  you are automatically subscribed to the  translation  When changes are made to the original document from which the translation was  made  you will receive a notification via email and a posting on your personal page     Related content is uPerform content that is associated with other uPerform content within the  same project on the server  Related content does not share properties with other content but rather  allows you to identify content with similar characteristics for display on your end user website   For example  within the   Acme Corp  project  you can have a  Sales Team  folder that contains a  document for filling out a timesheet  In that same project  you can have a  Sales Clerk  folder   Some of the codes in the  Sales Team  document could be relevant to the  Sales Clerk   You can  relate this document from  Sales Team  folder to content in the  Sales Clerk  folder     Working with Translated Content    Creating translated content allows you to customize content to reflect processes that
166. er     00 00     z   4    5  Complete the following fields     HU NENNEN I 1 MEME    Enter a name for the LMS   Description Enter a description for the LMS           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  135    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       6     E Pe o o   Enter a name for the LMS     URL Enter the website address of the LMS  For example   http   acme uLearn com     URL Encoding Select the URL encoding format from the dropdown  list    Authentication Required Click the checkbox if you want to require  authentication    Login If authentication is required  enter the login name  associated with the LMS     Password If authentication is required  enter the password  associated with the LMS     Password Confirmation Confirm the password    Track Alerts Select Yes if you want to track alerts for collect   receipt  and update messages to the uPerform server    Active Server Select Yes to enable communication with the LMS   Select No to disable communication with the LMS    E Mail Address Enter the email address where you can receive alert  notifications     Click Save     Modifying LMS Properties    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace     Click Server Administration in the Administration area   Click LMS Settings in the System Administration area   Click on the name of the LMS you want to modify   Click Edit Properties on the left menu     As required  edit the following fields        Field  Description  Enter a name for the LMS   Enter a descrip
167. er built by context assignment is  identified by a    to the left of the folder name     Optionally  you can populate your website via dynamic website folders  For more information   refer to Building the Website via Dynamic Website Folders  on page 119      Using Website Folders for Context Assignment    Adding a Website Folder    1     2     Click sisi  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Website     Click Add Folder on the left menu     Create a New Folder    Location  Website       Description     Complete the following information     Field      Description  Name Enter the name of the website folder        Description Enter amplifying information about the folder and  its contents     Click OK     Repeat Step 4 through Step 6 to create additional folders and subfolders at the desired  location s         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  113    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Updating Website Folder Properties    1     2     6        Click  amp sises  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name    Click Website    Navigate to the desired folder     Click Edit Properties on the left menu     Edit General Properties    Name  Sales Timesheet Information    Description     a Add Multiple Languages    Language Filter    Filtered v    Edit the following information     Field  Description               Name Edit the website folder name   Description Edit the amplifying information about the folder and  its contents     Add Multipl
168. er the  property name from the directory server  For a  file source  enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user ID     Unique Identifier  For a directory server  enter  the property name from the directory server  For  a file source  enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the unique identifier  This  allows uPerform to update the user if it is  changed in the directory server or file source     Email Address  For a directory server  enter the  property name from the directory server  For a  file source  enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the email address           ANCILE Solutions  Inc     43    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Field Description                   First Name  For a directory server  enter the  property name from the directory server  For a  file source  enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user s first name     Last Name  For a directory server  enter the  property name from the directory server  For a  file source  enter the XPath string from the user  element in the file to the user s last name     Enable Automatic Synchronization This option allows you to automatically  synchronize filters created for this user source   This will allow you to quickly synchronize from  a specific user source when a new file is  uploaded  file is updated on the web  changes are  made to the directory server  or changes are  made to the field mapping     It
169. eral Properties Phrases  Publications   Styles   Blocks   Sections  Ready             3  Choose from the following options     If You Want To    Select the publication type you want to copy  and  click Duplicate     Select the publication type you want to delete   and click Delete     determine where the publication type will display  in the uPerform website drop down list     Move the publication type later in the   Click Move Down one or more times as needed  list to determine where the publication type will  display in the uPerform website drop down list        4  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  233    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Setting Default Publication Settings    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Click Default Publication Settings in the task pane     File Edt View Format Toos Help  aceno Ase 000 41  4aQgy   Ase                      4  Select one of the following options     If You Want To    Modify document publication settings    Modify simulation publication settings    Modify student guide publication  settings          Select Document under Default Publication  Settings in the task pane     Refer to Default Publication Settings  Document   on page 235  for more information     Select Simulation under Default Publication  Settings in the task pane     Refer to Default Publication Settings   Simulation  General Settings  on page 237    Default Publication
170. erences the end user who accesses content via online help or a  performance support website  shares content links with other users  and provides feedback to  authors     Organization Of This Manual    Chapters 2 through Chapter 13 and Appendix A contains information intended for the  administrator or project administrator  This manual also contains a glossary with terms and  definitions relevant to the concepts discussed within this manual        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  3    Chapier 1  Introduction       Conventions Used In This Manual    The following conventions are used in this manual     Indicates a field name  button name  or an option     Example     Click General on the left pane     Indicates a screen or window title   Example     The Step Properties window is displayed     SMALL CAPS AND Indicates a menu path   GREATER THAN SYMBOL Example       gt   Select START  gt  PROGRAMS  gt  ANCILE UPERFORM     A o Indicates an important concept or a caution   Soo Indicates a helpful hint or amplifying information           4 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 1  Introduction          Available Technical Support    In addition to the online help delivered with uPerform  ANCILE offers several additional support  mechanisms     O The ANCILE Product Support Center is available at https   ancile parature com        CJ Optional instructor led training  For additional information about our training  Services  contact your sales representative        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  5    Chapter 
171. erm Definitions    Terms and definitions are displayed in recorded Field Description tables within the document  view of uPerform content  Field description tables that are inserted during editing as a step will  not support glossary functionality  The following is an illustration of a recorded Field Description  table     6  As required  complete review the following fields     Field R O C Description  Subject  R This is the title of your appointment   Example     Subject of Appointment    If your project is using a centralized glossary  definitions are created and managed by the  administrator and inserted into the document during check in or during a process called  globalization  You can also manually insert or update definitions during editing  In addition  you  can suggest a new definition for the administrator   s consideration     Updating Definitions    Q Prior to updating definitions from the editor  you must have checked the document into  the server and closed the document in the uPerform editor     1  Select OPEN  gt  OPEN FROM ANCILE UPERFORM SERVER      2  Select the document to open    3  Click OK    4  Click the Document tab     5  Select TOOLS  gt  UPDATE TERM DEFINITIONS     The Field Description tables in the document are updated with definitions from the server     Suggesting a Definition  1  Open a document in the editor   2  Click the Document tab     3  Navigate to the Field Description table        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  167    Chapter 9  Working with
172. erties from which you want to create your dynamic    website folder     Q Changing the template will remove all filter criteria from the folder     14  Optionally  select Search all templates to expand the dynamic website folder to other  templates with matching properties     15  Click Next   Edit Dynamic Website Folder  Select the filter conditions for this dynamic website folder  Filters allow you to specify what documents will display in this dynamic website folder   Add Filter Condition  Property Condition Value  Descrip tion       wes  Current Filter  Property Condition Value          16  Select a template property from the Property drop down list     17  Select a condition from the Condition drop down list     Field  Description                  Contains Any       Contains the exact values to be specified in Step 17   and will return all documents with the Transaction  Code property    For example     Transaction Code   ME25 will return all  documents with the Transaction Code property set to  ME25     Contains any of the values to be specified in Step  17  which allows you to provide a comma delimited  list of values within the Value field     For example     Transaction Code Contains Any ME25  VA01  will return all documents with the Transaction Code  property set to ME25 OR VAOI     Contains the exact value specified in Step 19     18  Enter a value s  in the Value field     19  Click Add     20  Repeat Steps 15 through 18 to edit additional filtering conditions in 
173. et to false  any user with access to an SRM screen can view help  content for the screen using the Help link     This modification affects the Help link for every SRM screen  Be sure to verify that  help content is ready for each available SRM screen before performing the following  steps  The Help link links blindly to a page that matches its ID     In the wpintegration js file  ensure that the SHOW_ID property is set to false   Save the wpintegration js file   Click Publish     Refresh the SRM screen displayed in the web browser     Q You may need to clear your browser s cache or Temporary Internet Files     In the desired Business Server Pages  BSP  application screen  select the Help link to open a  new browser window that displays help content for the screen        314    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring SAP CRM Web Client for Use with Context Sensitive Help    Before you can specify a connection between the uPerform server and SAP CRM Web Client  you  must activate context sensitive help within SAP CRM Web Client  The context sensitive help  option is indicated by a question mark     in the SAP CRM Web Client user interface  When a  user clicks on the    any help created for that screen will display  For more information on  activating context sensitive help within SAP CRM Web Client  refer to the SAP CRM Web Client  documentation  Context sensitive help for SAP CRM Web Client is available only through the IC  Web Client 
174. ete   5  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add a phrase In the content pane  click Add   Select a language from the left navigation pane   Enter the phrase in the Content pane   Click OK   Modify a phrase Select a phrase in the content pane   Click Modify   Optionally  select a new language from the left  navigation pane   Edit the phrase in the Content pane        Duplicate a phrase Select the phrase you want to duplicate from the  Content Pane     Click Duplicate     Delete a phrase Select the phrase you want to delete   Click Delete   At the prompt  click Yes        6  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  229    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Specifying New Template Settings  Publications    Manage All Publications  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Publications on the status bar                       Manage All Publications 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000  ASAP BPP  ASAP BPP Cue Card                                                          Quick Reference  Flow   Quick Reference  Step      Simulation                                  ISI SI  S  S  S   S   ST IST IST IST  T ST   ST   STIST E                                           4  General Properties Phrases  Publications Styles   Blocks   Sections  Ready          3  Click the checkbox in the Enabled column next to the publication types you want to enable        230 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates      
175. eue and History    You must be a part of the uPerform Glossary Administrators group to configure glossary settings  and manage the glossary queue  For detailed information on uPerform groups  refer to Managing  Users  Roles  and Groups  on page 29     The globalize queue displays the documents that require update  The globalize history list displays  a record of globalization events  both documents globalized upon check in and daily globalize  runs  for the current day  You can view history records from the last 30 days     A After 30 days  history records are removed on a first in first out basis  History records  are not archived     Viewing the Globalize Queue  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area     4  Click View Globalize Queue on the left menu    t Glossary Queue    Document Name Project Name Date Last Modified Entered By Reason Date Entered Status    Sales_Order Acme ERP Project     3 5 2007 9 46 PM cbrowr Document t     3 5 2007 9 46     Wailng  Remove Globalize  PM    5  Review the following information     Document Name The name of the document included in the globalize  processing    Project Name The name of the project containing the document   Date Last Modified The date of the last document modification     Entered By The author who last added the document    Reason The activity which caused the document to be added  to t
176. fications from your personal page  To  display all links  click More        Using the My Projects List    Your My Projects list displays those projects to which you have been granted access by the  administrator  Typically  these are the projects to which you are contributing or reviewing content   From the My Projects list  you can access both the document library and the end user views of  the projects to which you have author rights     1  Select one of the following options to view details about a project     If You Want To    Display the document library  Click on the name of the project in the My Projects list     view of a project For detailed information on document libraries  refer to Working With  the Document Library  on page 63      Display the end user view of   Click    to the right of the project in the My Projects list  Optionally   a project click the View as End User link in the left pane on any project  folder   or document cover page     For detailed information on websites  refer to Working With the  Website  on page 111         2  For detailed information on creating projects  see Populating the Document Library  on page  76      Using the My Review List    Your My Review List displays content currently in a workflow assigned to you  To view a  workflow item in your review list     1  Click on the document name in the My Review List to go to the document page     2  Click I Approve or I do not Approve in the Workflow portion of the window        ANCILE S
177. figuring the connection  profile     Return to the application Close the browser window     Search for additional content Enter a search term s  in the Search field   Click Search     Search for two terms Enter Term 1 followed by AND followed by  Term 2     For example  Project AND accounting    This would find all uPerform content that  contains both Project and accounting     Search for one term or another Enter Term 1 followed by OR followed by Term  2     For example  Project OR accounting    This would find all uPerform content that  contains either Project or accounting           326 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       If You Want To    Search for literal string Enter the literal string in quotation marks     For example   Project Accounting     This would find all uPerform content that  contains the exact string  Project Accounting         Literal search strings cannot contain either    or   within the string  These are stripped  out by the uPerform server as non allowed characters        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  327    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak  Content    The Migration Wizard delivered with ANCILE uPerform allows you to  migrate your ANCILE Info Pak project into the uPerform server  In  addition  you can use the Migration Wizard to enable display of Info  Pak content from the uPerform website and to transform Info Pak  documents and simulations to uPerform documents        329    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content        
178. g   54  managing   52  modifying    53  136  rollback   70  version    101  S  SAP CRM 2007   298  315  configuration   315  searching   20  from server   20  server   10  help   15  left menu   21  logging into   10  overview   18  top banner   19  workspace   10  server configuration   127  publishing from server   127  server product information   15  settings   216  data files   219  general   216  253  glossary   170  images   218  information   216  languages   220  LMS   242  257  package editor   263  user interface   240  255  view Info Pak   222  Siebel 8   318  skins   285  creating   287  managing   288  stopping   27  151  subscriptions   27  workflow   151  styles   266  270  271  272  view   271    subscribing to content   26  subscriptions   27  discussions   160  editing   27  publish events   134  stopping   27  suggesting   167  definition   167  168  suggestions    179  accepting   179  rejecting   180  viewing   179  synchronize   60  groups   60  synonyms   181  adding   181  managing    181  removing   181  T  tell others   163  templates   214  215  216  218  219  220   224  225  228  233  235  231  240  242   243  253  255  257  259  260  266  270   271  272  273  276  278  283  assigning   32  69  115  137  creating   214  deleting from local computer   283  manage locally   216  open   215  properties   224  settings   216  update    69  70  updating for use with transformation   348  version   69  working with    69  term definitions   167  terms  
179. gs from the Task Pane                          n  amm  Info Pak Settings  Auto Generate Exercise  Procedure From Simulation   Definition Styles     P101 Table FieldDef AUR  P102_Table_FieldDef         WV   F    i       Table_Field  _   P102_Table_Field             Info Pak uPerform     doc  Procedure Procedure    doc_BPP ASAP BPP  doc_Configinfo Configuration Information  doc Exercise Exercise Data Sheet  doc_Overview Purpose    doc_Result Result  doc Testlnfo Test Information                            eS  General   Properties Phrases Publications Styles Blocks Sections Ready       4  Review the following fields     Q The following options are not configurable within the uPerform template     Field Description                Auto Generate Exercise The Auto Generate Exercise option is selected  during the migration  This option is not  configurable within the uPerform template     Procedure From Simulation The Procedure from Simulation option is  selected during the migration  This option is not  configurable within the uPerform template     Definition Styles Displays the definition styles used in the original  Info Pak content  This option is not configurable  within the uPerform template     Term Styles Displays the term styles used in the original Info  pak content  This option is not configurable  within the uPerform template     Section Mappings Displays the mapped sections specified during  migration  This option is not configurable within  the uPerform template        
180. gt  Before you enable multi language support you must specify a default language  This language will be displayed if the users    language is not available    gt To enable multi language support  select a default language and click the  enable  button below     English  United States   en US  M    V Enable     3 Cancel    9  Select a default language from the list     10  Click Enable     Edit Dynamic Website Folder    This wizard allovs you to create a dynamic website folder that searches for documents based on specified filter conditions       Language Specific Properties     Name  Description        English  United States   en US   Acme HR Training             Chinese  China   zh_CN           German  Germany   de DE                Spanish  Spain   es ES           French  France   fr FR           Default Language         English  United States   en_US     Disable Multiple Languages       J    Language Filter    Filtered    Next      cancel    11  Go to Step 13     12  Click Next     Edit Dynamic Website Folder    Please select the template that is being used to create the documents that this dynamic website folder vill contain  If more than one template is being  used please select a template which defines all the properties needed by the filtering conditions     Templates  HR udt            7  Search all templates            Previous  dr Next  EJ Cancel       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  123    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       13  Select the template containing the prop
181. h the Glossary                                        esusuuuu  165  Introduction to the GHossary    uie ern eet aset en nsu tUe aeta Po Fe eR Pes A EN Le XS E PN VR aeu re eda 166  Specify ne Term Defiitlofis eeu sesh dco ia dav gue aa e auae dqe ie edi ed eg a pene usus 167  Browsing the Glossary from the EGiMOr  Lie eie i Ble depicta eddie SARA 169  Managing Glossary Set  ngs    use e ed EIE TUE C In ER QUIA THE dE CURL d SUR AR EE E SEE 170  Adding Terms and Definitions   os ooutites tat tas octo inep ic tenti  173  Updating Terms  and Definitions eter e EE Pepe sere atid ae eee 176  Managing Glossary Suggestions ic ee e d e dpa boe Mu Seele dee deb a ek 179  Manasi Synonyms ooi tee eed eoi qe tang roseus ad esu rdi quio pev ener aeri Pies deer quads 181  Using GlOD Alt C                               M         183  Globalizing Doc  mentS cce roni o ee S a E Ipeaffacs detis ara anaes  184  subseribimg to Glossary E Ventes soos erru ies Ones du adii A ten oppo tub aad aah saP icu Ed Ner s Eus 187  Tracking Term and Definition Usage    iet tette tea to eoe eh eee aa rH ES e Arana rt e ga 188  Importing and Exporting a Glossary and Translations    191  Chapter 10  Using Reports    iie ae ae en 197  Introduction to  Reporting RD                     198  Workins With eDOFESG  ase ede ape ea esas tc tese au udine E oue eaten pe edere odi rues 199  Create and Edit Custom BOeporis o6 Gebet Iac agana Saa els Ue iL E aS ius ars aE iiia 205  Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       
182. h the Glossary          Managing Glossary Suggestions    Authors can suggest alternate definitions for a term from the editor workspace     The glossary administrator is responsible for reviewing glossary suggestions and accepting or  rejecting the suggestion     You must be a Glossary Administrator to review and act on suggestions  For detailed information  on uPerform groups  refer to Managing Users  Roles  and Groups  on page 29      Viewing Suggestions  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click View All Suggestions to display a list of all terms with suggestions   3  Click on a term to view the suggestion s      4  Scroll to the Suggestions portion of the window to view the suggestion list     Q Suggestions in the same language and context of an existing definition display only as  a link  Click on a link to view the suggestion     Accepting a Suggestion  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click View All Suggestions to display a list of all terms with suggestions   3  Click on a term to view the suggestion s      4  Scroll to the Suggestions portion of the window  and click Accept to add this suggestion as a  new definition     Accepting a Suggestion Intended to Replace the Current Definition  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click View All Suggestions to display a list of all terms with suggestions   ANCILE Solutions  Inc  179       Chapier 9  Working with the Glossary       3  Clic
183. h to the website even if the template is not assigned to the project in which the content  resides     A Note that all content must be assigned a website context  either at the document level  or the folder level  before published server content will display on the website     Publishing Configuration    You must be a part of the uPerform Publishing Administrators role to configure publishing  settings and manage the publish queue  For detailed information on uPerform roles  refer to  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups  on page 29      ANCILE uPerform content types available for publishing are controlled by the template used to  create the content  uPerform content formats available for publishing are controlled by the server   If the template for the document has been updated  you can republish all documents associated  with the template     Output formats for managed documents  in Microsoft Word  PowerPoint  and Excel formats  are  dictated by the conversion types enabled  Managed documents in other formats  for example   pdf  and  zip files  are not technically published to an alternate format or type  However  you must add  these managed documents to the publish queue in order to have the managed document display on  the website  This final step in the development process allows you to maintain access control to  your managed documents     Web documents are not technically published to an alternate format or type  However  you must  add the web document to the publish queu
184. has been approved by one or more  reviewers during workflow  the approvers are    listed     Next Approver If the document is still within an active workflow   the next approver in the sequence is displayed    Workflow Start Date The date the workflow began    Workflow End Date The date the workflow ended     A When a new version of a document is checked in  the version number will be  incremented and a new entry will display in the workflow history  Workflow history  information will be cleared out if a new version of a document is checked in  or is  automatically globalized when a definition is updated           154 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content    Via the ANCILE uPerform server workspace  authors and  administrators can view both author generated and user generated  discussion forums  In addition  authors  administrators  and end users  can use the Tell Others feature to send hyperlinks to content of interest  to other uPerform users        155    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content          Introduction to Collaboration    There are two types of discussions in uPerform  document level and folder level     CJ Document level  Document level discussions are created automatically when a new    document is created and exist in both the Document Library  private  and Website   public  spaces  Author to author discussions and end user to author feedback are  private to authors  End users contribute feedback via the Send Feedback link available  on
185. he  home page    Copyright Select Copyright to display the copyright on the   home page     Publish date Select Publish Date to display the publish date on  the home page    Simulation Stencil Mode Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to set   Order the simulation stencil mode order    Match the course stage size   Select Match the course stage size to display the  course at the same size as the imported PowerPoint    Specific dimensions Select Specific dimensions to display the course in  a specified width and height    Increase slide size if possible   Select Increase slide size if possible to increase the  size of the slides     6  Choose from the following player elements     Fild  Description              simulation in the published course     Enables the Glossary button in the published course        Resources Enables the Resources button in the published  output        7  Select the Enable player element in published output checkbox to enable the use of the  selected element  Repeat this step for each player element     8  Click Select Phrase to select a phrase for the player        254 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       9  Perform one of the following phrases     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add     Select a language from the left     Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text in
186. he Browser type in the Browser field   Click OK           252    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates    If You Want To    Modify an existing operating   Select an operating system browser combination   system browser configuration   select Modify        Change operating system browser setting as desired   Click OK     Delete an existing operating   Select an operating system browser combination   system browser configuration   Select Delete     Click Yes        Q The Operating System and Browser settings are detected by Guided Help during  launch  At this time  there are no custom settings for each mobile device     6  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course  General Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        4  Select Course General Settings from the drop down list        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  253    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       5  Complete the following fields     Q These options are pulled from the document properties and are customizable  For more  information on customizing properties  refer to Specifying New Template Settings   Properties  on page 224      Field  Description           Select Title to display the title on the home page     Author Select Author to display the author on the home  page    Description Select Description to display the description on t
187. he description for the filter     Directory Server Base DN Edit the Directory Server Base DN     Example  OU uPerform  DC acme  DC com    This option is not available if your  user information source is created  from a file     Filter String Edit the filter string   For a directory server  enter an LDAP    amp  objectClass user  memberOf CN Human  Resources  OUzGroups  OUzuPerform DC zac  me DC com    For a file user source  enter the XPath query to  the user  Example   users user   group  HR        8  Click OK        Q The filter is activated once it is applied to a group  To apply a filter to a group  refer to  Creating a Group     46 ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Deleting a User Information Source Filter    9    A user source filter cannot be deleted if it is synchronizing     Click Administration on the left menu    Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area    Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   Select the  User Source  hyperlink    Select the  Filter Name  hyperlink     Select Delete Filter on the left menu     Click OK    A Members of the deleted filter will be removed from the groups to which the filter was  assigned  If members are not assigned to another group within uPerform  the accounts  will be deleted     Synchronizing a User Information Source Filter    9    Administrators can synchronize accounts at a filter  directory server file source  or  server level  Synch
188. he project     5  Click Save        Deleting a Project    Deleting a project will delete all content in both the document library and website  all associated  project groups  and the security policies  custom configurations  and modified properties of the    project   A A deleted project is not sent to the recycle bin  A deleted project cannot be restored   1  Click sissa     2  Click on the project name to go to the project cover page   3  Click Delete Project on the left menu     4  Read the instructions carefully to determine if you want to delete the project or simply remove  access to the project     Deleting Acme ERP Implementation    Please read carefully       larger than simply clicking the delete button and making the project disappear  The act of deleting a  on the server to remove items that may become security threats if not removed properly  Deleting a project      ALL modified properties    Alternatives to Deleting          74 ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       5  Click I still want to delete     Deleting AcmeCorp Project    Note about Info Pak Documents    While deleting content within a project may have its own drawbacks  deleting a project with Info Pak content presents its own risks  Please  be aware that deleting a project will delete ALL associated Info Pak content REGARDLESS OF WHICH PROJECT IT IS IN  For example  if  your Web Architect database had content in more than one website  that content will be remove
189. he queue     Date Entered The date and time the document entered the queue     Status The status of the globalization activity  In Queue   Waiting  Processing  or a failure indicator  for the  current document        6  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the queue        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  185    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       T     Perform one or more of the following actions     if You Want To    Empty the globalize queue    Click Delete All on the left menu     Immediately process all documents in   Click Globalize All on the left menu   the globalize queue    Refresh the globalize queue    Remove a single document    Click Refresh Queue on the left menu     Click Remove next to the document you want to  remove        Globalize a single document Click Globalize Now next to the document you  want to globalize     Viewing the Globalize History    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click Glossary in the Server Administration area    Click View History on the left menu     Review the following information     Field     Description  Document Name Lists the title of the globalized document     Date Started Lists the date and time the globalize process was  started    Date Completed Lists the date and time the globalize process was  completed     Terms Processed Lists the number of uPerform terms processed    during the globalization activity   
190. he right of Welcome  Anonymous        4  Enter your user name and password   5  Click OK     6  Perform one of the following actions     If You Want To    Log into the server for the Go to Step 7   first time     Explore the server workspace    Refer to Exploring the Server Workspace  on page 17            10 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 2  Getting Started       7  Complete the following fields   Field  Description O o O    Time Zone Select your time zone from the Time Zone drop down list to ensure the  correct date and time display on objects within the server        Language Select a language from the Language drop down list to ensure the  desired interface language displays when you are working in the server     8  Click Save     Retrieving Your Password    If you click Cancel on the login screen  the Help Desk window is displayed  Password retrieval  does not apply if SSO is enabled     1  Click Reset Password on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Enter your username   3  Click OK     4  Click OK on the confirmation page     Your password will be emailed to you     Requesting a New User Account  1  Click Log In to the right of Welcome  Anonymous   2  Click Cancel on the Login screen   3  Click Request User Account on the left menu of the server workspace     4  Complete the following fields     Fies  Description    Select a language from the drop down list           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  11    Chapter 2  Getting Started       Field  Description             E
191. hor Templates       Default Publication Settings  Package Editor  Q You can edit the SCORM and AICC imsmanifest xml file via the package editor     1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Package Editor in the task pane     Package Editor    Package File   SCORM 12       4  Select the package file type from the Package File drop down list   5  In the code box  insert the cursor where you want to insert a variable   6  Select the variable s  to be included from the Variables list    7  Click the right arrow to add the variable s  to the package file    8  Edit the file as desired    9  Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each element you want to add     10  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template   ANCILE supports the following elements from the SCORM AICC specifications     Package File Supported Data Elements    SCORM 1 2 Lesson Status  cmi core lesson status   Lesson Location  cmi core lesson  location   Suspend Data  cmi suspend data     Raw Score  cmi core score raw     Min Score  cmi core score min     Max Score  cmi core score max     Session Time  cmi core session time        Interactions  cmi interactions        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  263    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Package File Supported Data Elements    Interaction ID  cmi interactions n id   Interaction Time  cmi interactions n time   Interaction Type  cmi interactions n type   Interaction Correct Response   cmi interactions n correct_responses n p
192. hrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Simulation  Mobile Device  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Simulation under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        244 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Mobile Device Publication Settings     Eee     Simulation Publication Settings     z                         5  Highlight an item in the Values list     6  Perform one of the following options     It You Want To    Add a mobile device publication setting   Click Add   Enter Operating System   Enter Browser   Click OK     Modify a mobile device publication Click Modify     setting Enter Operating System     Enter Browser   Click OK     Delete a mobile device publication Click Delete   setting Click Yes     Q The Operating System and Browser settings are detected during launch  At this time   there are no custom settings for each mobile device        7T  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  245    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Default Publication Settings  Student Guide    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Student Guide under Default P
193. ick OK    Select a value    Click Modify    Edit the text    Click OK    Select a value    Click Delete    Click Yes    Click Select Phrase    Click Add    Select a language from the left   Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Click Select Phrase   Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK     8  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Creating and Managing Custom Properties    1     2  Click Properties on the status bar     From the editor  open the new template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     225    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Manage Custom Properties in the task pane        Manage Built In Properties  Owner       Ga Add   O     Status    3   Modify Transaction Code s   Reference Number    i Duplicate CEU 1   Category             Category 4  C 5  4M Move Up eric 6  Category 7  Category 8  Category 9  Category 10  Category 11  Category 12  Publication Date  Version Number   Version          Roles  Solution Release  Keywords  Description  Copyright  Dynpro    Msgv1  Msgv2    ond       General   Properties   Phrases  Publications Styles Blocks Sections  Ready    4  Select one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a new custom property Click Add   Select a language from the drop down list   Enter a name   Click OK   Go to Step 5     Modify an existing custom property Go to Step 5     Duplic
194. identifiers are stored in step properties     O Transaction code within the Purpose block  In a uPerform document  this displays  the value contained in the transaction code property  ANCILE recommends you  delete this section if you are providing context sensitive help for applications where  the context identifier would not be meaningful to an end user  In some applications   such as SAP GUI for Windows and SAP HTML GUI  the context identifier is based  on the task or transaction and a single context identifier is applicable for the entire  document For other applications  a screen level context identifier is used  In these  cases there may be multiple identifiers per document or the identifier is too long to be       294    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       meaningful to end users  In this case  deleting the transaction code from the Purpose  block may be appropriate           1  Create a template in uPerform     Q A uPerform project administrator typically creates and customizes templates  For more  information  refer to Using Author Templates  on page 211      2  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Provide context sensitive help without   Select the Blocks tab     a Transaction Code property In the task pane  select Purpose     In the Content area  delete the lines      Transaction Code     TransactionCode      Provide context sensitive help usinga   Go to Step 3   Transaction Code property       3  Click the Proper
195. igned     Document Library Context The location of the binder in the document library     Website Context  if The location s  in the website to which the binder is  applicable  linked     For more information on specifying website context   refer to Assigning a Website Context to Document  Library Content  on page 115      Related Documents Contains hyperlinks to other content you have  related to this document           80 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Viewing a Cover Page  1  Click gis   2  Click on the name of the project in which the content is stored   3  Click Document Library   4  Navigate to the folder in which the content is stored   5  Click on the name of the binder containing the content you want to view     6  Inthe Translations section  click on the name of the content        Custom Work instruction  uPertorm Document        7T  Review the following information on the cover page     LOIRE  I a    Version The current version designator for this document  To  view previous versions of the document  refer to the  Version History area on the document cover page     Status Document locked by  name    Indicates an author  has locked this document against another author s  edits    Available   Indicates this document is available for  checkout and editing     and the name of the modifier     Translation Status Displays if the translation is enabled for viewing on  the end user website           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  81   
196. ile that is either created on the server  or an HTML document that is created directly from the uPerform server  uPerform now allows  you to create a simple HTML based document with a rich text editor  The editor also allows you  to see what the finished document will look like while the document is being created     A web document is a link to a website or to a content location accessible via a unique web    address  The managed document and web document functionality allows you to maintain all of  your documentation and training file types and website links within the uPerform server     A managed document is identified by a to the left of the document title in the document library   A web document is identified by a    to the left of the document title in the document library     Q Web documents are not assigned to binders     Administrators  authors with the proper privilege  or the owner with proper privileges may delete  a document through the server workspace  When the document is deleted  the document is moved  to the project s recycle bin  For detailed information on managing the recycle bin  refer to  Managing the Recycle Bin  on page 108      Adding a Managed Document  1  Click    siss in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library     4  Navigate to the folder in which the managed document will be stored        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  85    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       5  Click Add Managed Document 
197. imited lists within the document  properties  The filter criteria look for an exact match    in the document property     Contains All Contains all of the keywords   Does not contain any of the keywords     13  Choose from the following options     If You Want To    Specify the field name as a variable Select the Variable radio button   object when generating reports          Specify the field name as a fixed object   Select the Fixed radio button   when generating reports    14  Click Add     15  Repeat Steps 11 through 14 to add additional filters to the report        206 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports       16  Optionally  click Delete next to a filter to remove it from the report     17  Click Save     Q Refer to Viewing Reports  on page 199  and Exporting Reports  on page 200  for  information on viewing the report output     Editing Custom and Copied Reports    1     2     5     Click Reports in the left menu     Click on the name of the custom or copied report you want to edit     Click Edit Report     Complete the following fields     Search all templates    Click Next     Edit Report    Enter a description for the report     Optionally  select the template associated with the  report from the drop down list  This gives you the  ability to create filters using template properties     Select this option to determine if you want to search  properties for all templates     Deselect this option to specify that you want the  search performed only on th
198. imulations and courses   For more information on tracking assessment results  refer to Using Reports  on page 197      1  Click    sisss in the uPerform server workspace    2  Click on the project name    3  Click Document Library    4  Navigate to the folder containing the document to be edited     5  Click on the name of the binder containing the content        90    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       6  Perform one of the following options     Reset the hit count for the Click Reset Hit Count on the left menu   binder and all of its translated  content    This functionality is available only for uPerform and  managed documents     Reset the hit count for a In the Translations section  click on the document to  single document go to the cover page     Click Reset Hit Count on the left menu     This functionality is available only for uPerform and  managed documents     Clear assessment results for a   Select Clear Assessment Results on the left menu     single document This functionality is available only for Info Pak  simulations and uPerform simulations and courses        7  Click OK     Moving Folders and Content    Administrators have access to move folders and content within the document library and the  website  You cannot move content between projects or between the document library and the  website     Q If you have moved content within the document library and want this content to  display in a new location on the end user 
199. ing  on the uPerform Server    Select the Show file properties on first save  checkbox to display the Properties    window to the  author upon the first save during a new recording     Enable or disable the Allow simulation publishing  on the uPerform Server checkbox to set the default  behavior on the document Properties    window  An  author can change this setting for an individual  document  This setting applies only to server  publishing of simulations     Choosing this option enables simulation publishing  on the uPerform Server for all simulations created  using this template           ANCILE Solutions  Inc     217    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field  Description               Show  Press Return  step after   Select Show  Press Return  step after Field  Field Description Table Description Table to display the return step after a  Field Description table     Field Label Separator Specifies what character should be used to separate  multiple labels in a Field Description table    Callout Color Select the color to be used for displayed callouts   Optionally  click Select to choose a color     5  Under Default Screen Display for Steps in the Document Editor  choose from the  following options     Field  Description          Always display Displays new screens for steps     Does not display new screens for steps   Only if it is the first time this   Displays a new screen in the document editor only  screen is used if the screen is different from the previous s
200. inition        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  129    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Viewing the Publish Queue and History    The publish queue displays the publish events scheduled to start  Both uPerform and managed  documents are displayed in the publish queue     The publish history list displays a record of publishing events from the last 30 days     A After 30 days  history records are removed on a first in first out basis  History records  are not archived     Viewing the Publish Queue  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click Publishing in the Server Administration area     4  Click View Publishing Queue on the left menu        Publishing Queue    Document Name Project Name Date Last Modified Entered By Date Entered Status    HRL Acme ERP 3 25 2008 5 09 PM cbrown 3 25 2008 5 09 11 PM In Queue       Acme ERP 3 25 2008 5 09 PM cbrovn 3 25 2008 5 09 11 PM In Queue       Acme ERP 3 25 2008 5 09 PM cbrovm  3 25 2008 5 09 11 PM In Queue    5  Review the following information     Field  Description                  Document Name The name of the document included in the publish  processing     The name of the project containing the document   Date Last Modified The date and time the document was last modified     Entered By The ID of the user who last added the document     Date Entered The date and time the document was added to the  queue    Status The current status of the publ
201. ion  task  and system access     Using the Navigation Buttons    The following buttons are available throughout the server workspace  Your specific location in the  website will affect whether a particular button is active     C   Se Pye    Click this button to go to the top level of uPerform     The top level displays a list of all uPerform projects to which you have  access        oie    Our   Click this button to move up one level from your current location   The use of the browser Back button is not recommended        sed    Click this button to go to your personal page        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  21    Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       Using the Left Menu Options    The options available on the left menu will vary based upon your location in the system and your  system access  The menu is divided into three sections  actions  areas  and inform  The left menu  can be collapsed to increase screen real estate        Actions                Inform  Add To My Favorites    Tell Others          2 coe EDU dam p    The following options are available within the three sections on the left menu     Action entries Available actions will vary based on your current area and system  access     Examples of action entries include  Assign Website Context and Start  Workflow     My Account Select this option to view or edit your account details  including your  password  and subscriptions     For more information  refer to Editing Your Account Information  on  page 13       
202. ionality   This allows you to inherit fields and properties from one report to the next     You can also create custom reports containing uPerform properties  as well as for hit counts on  uPerform content     A few guidelines to consider regarding uPerform server reports     m        Punctuation is ignored in content filtering with the exception of keywords separated  by a comma or an asterisk used to denote the presence or the absence of a value     Stemming is incorporated on all filters  For example  if you enter  general  into a  filter field  you will receive a return for  generic      The maximum number of hits that can be returned from a report is 10 000     Reports do not support server side paging  which can affect the wait time and  performance speed of the server        198    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports          Working with Reports    The following basic functionalities apply to all reports within the uPerform server  viewing   exporting  deleting  For information on creating and editing custom and copied reports  refer to  Create and Edit Custom Reports  on page 205      Viewing Reports    1  Click Reports in the left menu      amp  Reports         Assessment Performance Report    Displays a detailed report of results for courses and assessments assigned to a project      Document Tracking Report    Displays a detailed report of the documents assigned to a project        Published Content Report          Displays a detailed report of the
203. ipating in a Workflow    When a workflow process begins for a document  the first user in the workflow queue receives an  email message indicating the document is awaiting review  The email also contains a link to the  document within the uPerform system     Using the My Review List    Your My Review List displays content currently in a workflow assigned to you  The five most  recent documents are displayed  To display all documents  click More       To view a workflow item in your review list   1  Click Homes   2  Click on the document name in the My Review List     3  From the document cover page  you can review the latest version of the document to approve  or reject the document     Making Comments or Changes During a Workflow    Reviewers are allowed to make changes to content during workflow if the author or administrator  who started the workflow has allowed approvers with editor rights access to edit the document     Approving a Document During Workflow    1  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Click I Approve in the Workflow area of the window     3  Click OK     Q When a document is approved by the final reviewer  the workflow creator receives  email notification of workflow completion        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  149    Chapter 7  Using Workflow       Rejecting a Document During Workflow    1  Go to the document cover page in the serve
204. ise Data Sheet                   Screen Flow  Procedure  Result          TUB    TRIMS ISTIS   lt                                   General Properties Phrases Publications Styles Blocks   Sections  Ready  3  Select a section from the Task Pane     4  Click the checkbox next to Visible to display the section in published documentation     Q New sections will display in all new documents and older documents will be upgraded  to add newly added sections when opened     5  Complete the following fields     Field  Description    Specify the header for the section   Specify the footer for the section        6  Click Select Phrase        276 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       7  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase    Select a phrase    Click Add    Select a language from the left    Enter the text in the Content area    Click OK    Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Under Content  perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add content to the section    Remove content    Click Add   Select a block from the list   Click OK     Click Remove     At the prompt  click Yes     Move content to earlier in the list Click Move Up one or more times as needed   Move content to later in the list Click Move Down one or more times as needed     9  Determine whe
205. ishing process for the  document        6  As necessary  click Previous or Next to navigate through the queue     7T  Optionally  click Remove to remove a document from the publish queue  or click Publish  Now to immediately publish the document        130 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       8  Perform one or more of the following actions     If You Want To  Empty the publish queue Click Delete All     Immediately process the publish queue   Click Publish All     You will need to refresh the web browser  window if you want to verify that publishing is  complete     Refresh the publish queue Click Refresh Queue        Viewing the Publish History  1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click Publishing in the Server Administration area   4  Click View History on the left menu      putishing History    Date Started Documents Processed    3 25 2008    5  Click on the hyperlink in the Documents Processed column to the right of the history date to  be reviewed   t Publishing Details    Process Date  3 25 2008    Document Name Date Started Date Completed Outcome Formats    3 25 2008 5 06 PM 3 25 2008 5 06 PM       3 25 2008 5 05 PM 3 25 2008 5 06 PM    3 25 2008 5 04 PM 3 25 2008 5 05 PM Success       3 25 2008 5 04 PM 3 25 2008 5 04 PM Success    6  Review the following information     Field  Description             Document Name The name of the document includ
206. k Open    Edit Rich Text HTML document on the   Click Lock    BeEVER Click Edit Content   Select the appropriate version number   Edit the content     Q Selecting Lock allows you to prevent others from using the document while you are  checking in a new version     Click Add Version     g Updating the managed document with versions also gives you the ability to revert back  to a previous version  if necessary     Verify the updated version is available     Adding a Web Document    1     2     Click  amp sises  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name   Click Document Library     Navigate to the folder in which the web document will be stored        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  87    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       5  Click Add Web Document on the left menu     Add a Web Document    URL   Name     Description     6  Complete the following information     URL Enter the web address of the document or link  for  example  http   www ancile com      Name The default name is populated from the website  If  desired  enter a name of the web document    Description The default description is populated from the  website  If desired  enter amplifying information  about the web document     7T  Click OK        Editing Properties for a Managed or Web Document  1  Click sss  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library   4  Navigate to the folder in which the web or managed document is stored   5  Click Edit Pro
207. k on a term to view the suggestion s      4  Scroll to the Definitions portion of the window to view the suggestion hyperlink to the right of    Context and click on the suggestion hyperlink     5  Under Suggestions  click Replace Existing to replace the current definition     Accepting a Suggestion to Create a New Definition    1     2     Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   Click View All Suggestions to display a list of all terms with suggestions   Click on a term to view the suggestion s      Scroll to the Definitions portion of the window to view the suggestion hyperlink to the right of  Context     Click on the suggestion hyperlink  and select Add New     Add a context to the definition as described in Assigning a Context to a Definition  on page  174      Rejecting a Suggestion    1     2     Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   Click View All Suggestions to display a list of all terms with suggestions   Click on a term to view the suggestion s      Scroll to the Suggestions portion of the window  and click Reject for the suggestion s         180    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Managing Synonyms  Synonyms allow the administrator to establish a relationship between two or more terms     If you remove a synonym  you remove the relationship between the affected terms  However   removing a synonym does not delete the term or definitions     Adding a New Synonym for a Term  1  Click Glossa
208. l Roles  and Groups area     Go to Step 4   Stop synchronization at the Filter level   Click User Information Sources in the Users   Roles  and Groups area   Click on a filter   Go to Step 4     Stop synchronization at the Group level   Click Groups in the Users  Roles  and Groups  area     Go to Step 4        4  Click Stop Synchronization in the left pane under Actions     5     Click OK     Viewing the Synchronization Log    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu   Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area     Click the  User Source  hyperlink containing the filter log you want to view     Filters    Name Description Group Count Last Run Status    Weekly Filter 1 4 16 09 2 29 PM Completed View Log    Click View Log next the filter to view the log from the last synchronization     Current Filter    Error v  Details    Date Type     Action    4 16 09 2 29 PM Error Unable to process user sauthor01  Illegal characters found in the e mail     From the Current Filter drop down list  select one of the following options     Feld Description         View All Select View All to view all events in the log        50    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups    Feld Description                      Information Select one of the following Information options        Information  Select Information to view all  added  updated  and removed users     Added  Select 
209. lay the username prompt on  the home page     LMS Package Type Select SCORM 2004  SCORM 1 2  or AICC from  the drop down list to select the output     For more information on packages  refer to Default  Publication Settings  Package Editor  on page 263      Package status value Select a completion type value from the drop down    list     This option is available only for SCORM 1 2 and  AICC     Assessment URI Enter a destination URI  Uniform Resource  Identifier  to send test results for capture by a  custom built utility instead of an LMS  You can  create an Active Server Page  ASP  or Java Server  Page  JSP  on a web server to receive the output for  subsequent storage and reporting in a learning  management system  Any technology that accepts  the form Post method using HTTP can be used to  handle the output     Example  http   www yourcompany com results asp    Note that if the student s web browser security  settings are set to High  warning messages will be  displayed   Q The Create Package option must be  disabled in order to enter a URI        6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description          Include in results Select the desired checkboxes to indicate the  information to be captured when the course  assessment is completed     Randomize questions in Select this option to randomize the order of   playback assessment pages    Provide individual feedback   Select this option to provide feedback on individual  assessment questions     Specify the required
210. ld  Description                      Playback Timer Select the up down controls to set the default time in  seconds that guided help displays for each page     Allow User to Store Select Allow User to Store Preferences checkbox    Preferences to allow users to store preference settings for  playback time  screen location of Guided Help   window size and window mode   maximize minimize            248 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       6  Complete the following fields   Q These options are set in the document properties and are customizable  For more    information on customizing properties  refer to Specifying New Template Settings   Properties  on page 224      Field  Description             Select Title to display the title on the home page     Author Select Author to display the author on the home  page    Description Select Description to display the description on the  home page        Copyright Select Copyright to display the copyright on the  home page    Publish date Select Publish Date to display the publish date on  the home page     7  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Guided Help  User Interface Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Guided Help under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  249    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Guided Help User Interface Settings from 
211. lect Simulation under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     4  Select Simulation LMS Settings from the drop down list        5  Complete review the following fields     Field  Description          Create package Click the Create Package checkbox to create LMS   conformant output for integration with a Learning  Management System  LMS      Show hints Select the Show hints checkbox to display hints  during the simulation self test or assessment test     Hints are nonessential data  for example  a user  name  required to complete the simulation     Enable remote proxy support   Only select the Enable remote proxy support  checkbox if you are instructed to do so by ANCILE  Product Support     Display username prompt Select this option to display the username prompt on  the home page           242 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field  Description         Package Type Select SCORM 2004  SCORM 1 2  or AICC from  the drop down list to select the output   You can edit the SCORM and AICC  imsmanifest xml file via the package editor  For  more information  refer to Default Publication  Settings  Package Editor  on page 263     Package Status Value Select a completion type value from the drop down  list     This option is available only for SCORM 1 2 and  AICC     Assessment URI Enter a destination URI  Uniform Resource  Identifier  to send test results for capture by a    custom built utility instead of an LMS  You can  create an Active Se
212. lect to confirm that this mode is available for  publishing    Playback Timer Specify the default wait time between steps during  auto playback     Display mouse path Select the Display mouse path checkbox to display  mouse movements associated with each step of the  simulation during auto playback     Loop auto playback mode Select this option to loop a simulation when viewed  in auto playback mode   Display action notes Select to display action notes     Display action note tail Select to display action note tail   Display hotspots Select to display hotspots        Enable simulation typing Select the Enable simulation typing sounds   sounds checkbox  and select a sound from the drop down  list to enable typing sounds during simulation  playback     For information on adding sound files to the  template  refer to Specifying General Settings  Data  Files  on page 219      Default Action Display Delay   Specify the default wait time for action display     Default Action Animation Select the default wait time for action animation   Delay   Default Action Entry Select Fade In or Display    Animation   Default Action Exit Select Fade Out or Hide    Animation          238 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       8  For Self Test mode  complete the following fields     Field  Description                 Enabled Select to confirm that this mode is available for  publishing     Help Mode Select from Auto playback mode or Standard  mode     Note Display Delay
213. lication  Settings in the task pane     Refer to Default Publication Settings  Course   General Settings  on page 253   Default  Publication Settings  Course  User Interface  Settings  on page 255   Default Publication  Settings  Course  LMS Settings  on page 257    Default Publication Settings  Course  Caption  Settings  on page 259   and Default Publication  Settings  Course  Page Settings  on page 260  for  more information     Default Publication Settings  Document    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Publications on the status bar        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     235    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Select Document under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     Document Publication Settings   V  Show RIOIC column 7  Show Example Sections  Use full text option value in R O C column i t   Mirror Margins    7  Publish Exercise Answers    E  Insert a page break before each screen shot                                                                                                   4  Complete review the following fields     Field  Description                          Display the R O C column in   Select Show R O C column to display the R O C  published output column in published output     Use full text option value in   Select Use full text option value in R O C column   R O C column to display Required  Optional  or Conditional in the  document editor  Show R O C column must be  selected in order to enable this option     Show Ex
214. lick Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click Help Desk in the Users  Roles  and Groups area     e Help Desk    E Request User Account    John Doe has requested a new account     4  Click Create Account below the name of the requestor to go to the Create User window     For detailed instructions on creating a user account  refer to Adding a User  on page 31      Unlocking a User Account    Q A user can be locked out of an account when an invalid number of logon attempts  occur  Users can still access the uPerform client in disconnected mode  but will only  have anonymous access to the server until the account has been unlocked     1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups   3  Click Help Desk     4  Click Unlock Account under Request Unlock Account for the user        36 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapier 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          Creating and Managing Users Via User Information Source    User information sources allow you to import and synchronize users from an external data source   This is useful if you have a globally diverse directory management system and want to import and  synchronize your users with uPerform    User information source functionality allows you to    O Import and synchronize user accounts in bulk via an XML formatted file     O Import and sync user accounts from one or more directory servers     O Access your user account identific
215. lick Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area     3  Click Glossary in the Server Administration area       g Glossary Configuration       7  Enable Glossary                7  Allow Rich Text in Definitions       Default Language for Definitions     English  United States  v    4  Select the desired default language from the Default Language for Definitions drop down  list     Q9  A definition in the default language is used when a term does not have a definition in  the document language  For this reason  you should ensure that all terms have a  definition available in the default language     5  Click Save        172 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Adding Terms and Definitions    When you add a new term  the term is available to all projects in the uPerform instance  Each  project can have one or more unique definitions for the term     Adding a Term and Definition    1     2     Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     Click Add Term on the left menu        Enter the new term to add     M save  D cance          Enter the new term in the Enter the new term to add field     Click Save to display the New Definition form     B New Definition for Order    Definition Language  English  United States  v     Font  w  se  y  B r u E    A 5   a         Balon a    Select the language for the definition from the Definition Language drop down list     En
216. lick Browse    to specify an inbox     11  Click Start to begin the check in process     Q The check in progress screen displays the percent complete status of the process  To  cancel the process  click Stop  Stopping the process does not  undo  documents that  were already checked in  A confirmation and status message is displayed at the end of    the migration run  From this message  you can access a log of migration activities  during the run     Q Published content child toolbar links in uPerform do not match Info Pak Web Architect  priority links     Updating a Template for Use with Transformation    Q You can update a template to populate the template with Info Pak transformation  settings or update existing transformation settings     1  Select START    PROGRAMS    ANCILE UPERFORM    MIGRATION WIZARD to open the  Migration Wizard     2  Review the prerequisites and  optionally  specify the interface language   3  Click Next   4  Select Update a uPerform template for transforming Info Pak documents     5  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration       Migration    Step 3  Connect to uPerform Server  Specify a connection with the uPerform server     uPerform server location   hitps          uPerform  Username L  Password      SSL Configuration             Trust invalid SSL certificates                Use Proxy Authentication       Usemame L      Password  az Test Connection          348 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       6  C
217. livered with the product cannot be opened in the  editor        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  215    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Managing Local Templates    1  Select FILE  gt  MANAGE LOCAL TEMPLATES          Manage Local Templates       Template              Course_Template udt       Import   Export       Remove                Close            2  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Import a template Click Import     Navigate to the template and click Open   Click OK    Export a template Select a template from the list   Click Export       Navigate to the template and click Open     Enter a name for the template   Remove a template Select a template from the list    Click Remove    Click Yes        Specifying New Template Settings  General    Specifying General Settings  Information  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        216 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Information in the task pane     File Edit View Format Tools Help Debug  IASBAC MOANA  GZ EE TRET  iRG RR SO BEBFSERBRBAMEALAIBUIS  gt  FSIEESSl   I  x  i 4BOR OOM                                           General  Properties Phrases Publications Styles Blocks Sections  Ready       4  Review the following information     Field  Description              Specifies the name of the new template   GUID Specifies the unique ID of the template     Show file properties on first  save    Allow simulation publish
218. ls are available to end  users quickly and conveniently  The most direct and effective link possible is one from a  particular task in an application to the relevant help in an online performance support system  You  can provide context sensitive help for Oracle E Business  SAP EP  SAP CRM Web Client  SAP  SRM Shopping application  Siebel  PeopleSoft  generic web pages  and applications supported  through Help Launchpad     The procedures in this section cover basic set up procedures relevant to all supported applications   including     Creating a template   Recording a document and making it available for context sensitive help  Specifying a connection to the uPerform server   Viewing and editing a connection to the uPerform server    Configuring the application for use with context sensitive help    QO OU QO QO u       Requesting help    Creating a Template    If you are planning to provide context sensitive help  you will need to create a template in which  to store context identifiers  Context identifiers are stored in the Transaction code property of the  uPerform template  Transaction code is a uPerform property used to identify a process  and is used  in two separate instances     O Transaction code property  The uPerform server matches this document property to  the associated screen when a call for help is made  This property is only populated  when you manually add a value to it  For situations where the Recorder automatically  captures the context identifier  the 
219. m Users        8  Click All Users     9  Click on the letter of the last name s  of  or search for  the user s  you want to add to the  group     10  Select the user s  from the list    11  Click Add Selected    12  Click OK    13  To edit filters to the group  click Filters    14  Select one or more filters from the Available Filters list   15  Click OK    16  Click OK     17  Click OK        58    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Deleting a Group    1  Click Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click Groups under Users  Roles  and Groups   58 Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group    Content Groups    EJANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users  Group 2    4  Click on the group you want to delete     58 Groups   Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group    Content Groups Selected Group     JANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users Name  Group 1  Description    Group 2   Users  o  Groups  o    Applied Filters     p add   T Edit    98 Delete    5  Click Delete     6  Click OK     A    This permanently deletes the group and any subgroup associated with the group  A  deleted group or subgroup cannot be restored     Viewing Users in a Group  1     Click Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     ANCILE Solutions  Inc        59    Chapier 4  Managing Users  R
220. m the List of All Properties list  choose com sap portal iview HelpURL    Click Edit    Build the help call URL by appending the Object ID copied in the Locating the iView Portal  Page ID  on page 307  to the URL generated when you specified a connection to the server  using the procedures found in Specifying a Connection with the uPerform Server     Paste the URL into the Property Value field     Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  309    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Modifying the Help Link in the Portal Masthead    By default  the Help link in the SAP EP masthead launches the SAP Help Portal  however  the  Portal Content Administrator can change the URL that is displayed by this Help link  For  example  you may wish to have this Help link display the home page of your custom or uPerform   generated website or display a specific page on your corporate intranet     To select the URL that is displayed by the Help link in the Portal masthead  perform the following    steps    1  Inthe Portal Catalog  go to Portal Users  gt  Standard Portal Users    2  Right click on the Default Framework page and select OPEN  gt  OBJECT    3  Check the Masthead iView checkbox and click Properties    4  Inthe Property Editor  from the Property Category drop down list  select Navigation   5  Inthe Property Editor  locate the URL of Help Link property    6  Inthe URL of Help Link property  enter the URL of the site you want to display    7  Click Save        310    ANCILE Solution
221. ment Project       6  Click the checkbox next to the name of the project s  to be assigned to the LMS     7  Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  137    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Unassigning Projects from an LMS    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click LMS Settings in the System Administration area    Click on the name of the LMS to be assigned to a project     Click Assigned Projects on the left menu     Assigned Projects   u360        select or unselect all                  V  Acme Development Project    lll save   Q cancel       Deselect the checkbox next to the name of the project s  to unassign from the LMS     Click Save     Enabling or Disabling an LMS    9    Enabling an LMS starts communication between the LMS and the uPerform server   Disabling an LMS stops communication between the LMS and the uPerform server   Disabling does not remove content already transmitted to the LMS  Communication  history is still available in the LMS Transactions area of the project cover page     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click LMS Settings in the System Administration area    Click on the name of the LMS you want to enable or disable   Click Edit Properties on the left menu     Choose one of the following options     To enable an LMS   Select the Yes radio button associat
222. n IDs directly into the uPerform server interface   Anyone subscribed to documents with these properties will be notified of the change  In addition   administrators can create integration credentials that will allow ANCILE Help Launchpad to  automatically update uPerform with a list of changed transactions  Once Help Launchpad and  uPerform are set up  Help Launchpad will send a list of changed transactions based on a schedule  set within Help Launchpad     To configure Help Launchpad to provide transaction change notification using uPerform  refer to  the Help Launchpad for ANCILE uPerform user manual     Manually Entering Transaction Notifications  1  Click sss  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Specify Changed Transactions     Specify Changed Transactions    Enter or paste a list of transaction codes or screen identifiers that have changed into the Changed Transactions text area  Multiple values must be separated by a new line     Changed Transactions          4  Enter changed transactions into the Changed Transactions  field  Each transaction must be  on a separate line     5  Select View Affected Documents to view the document names  not file names  that were  impacted by the changed transactions     6  Click OK to send notifications        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  105    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Creating Integration Credentials    1  Click ADMINISTRATION    SERVER ADMINISTRATION    INTEGRATION SETTINGS   
223. n list     Complete the following fields     Field  Description                  Case Sensitive    Require enter press    Right click    Image Quality    Bookmark       Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to require the  user to enter all text in the same case specified in the  action properties  provided an Edit action of type     Exact String    is used      Select the Require enter press checkbox to require  the user to press enter after an action     Select the mouse and key combination to be used to  represent a right click action in the simulation   Select a percentage from the drop down list     The Image Quality option allows you   g to specify the compression quality of  the image  ANCILE recommends the  default 85      Select Enabled  Disabled  or Mode Specific from  the drop down list to select a display setting for  bookmarks in the published output     Mode Order Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to  arrange the sequence of modes        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     237    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       6  For Assessment mode  complete the following fields     Field  Description          Enabled Select to confirm that this mode is available for  publishing     Help Mode Select from Auto playback mode  Standard mode   or Self Test mode     Note Display Delay Select the wait time before notes are displayed   Note Entry Animation Select Fade In or Display     7T  For Auto playback mode  complete the following fields    Field  Description          Enabled Se
224. nc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          Manually Creating and Updating User Accounts    User accounts are created and then assigned to one or more project roles to provide access to the  project  Each project within uPerform has three roles associated with the project  administrator   author  and user  These three roles are automatically created for each project upon project  creation  If a user is not part of one of these roles for a project  he will not see the project and its  contents when logged into uPerform unless an administrator has enabled anonymous access for  that project     Only system administrators can create user accounts  Each user account must have a unique  identifier and a unique email address  You can create user accounts in two ways  manually or by  synchronizing via a directory server or file source  For more information on synchronization  refer  to Creating and Managing Users Via User Information Source  on page 37      Adding a User  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   3  Click Users in the Users  Roles  and Groups area     4  Click Add New User on the left menu     Create a New User Account    The following information is required   User ID     First Name          Last Name        Password        Password Confirmation        Time Zone    africa Abidjan vi       Language    English  United States   en Us       Email Address     5  Complete the following requir
225. nderline   Italic  or Strikethrough  to apply rich text  formatting     Use Language Specific Fonts  Click the checkbox next to Use Language Specific  Fonts and click Select to choose the language  specific font s      Justification Specify a justification setting from the drop down  list    Margins Specify margins for Top  Bottom  Left  and Right   Optionally  select the unit of measurement from the  Unit drop down box    First Line Specify the indent of the first line   Optionally  select the unit of measurement from the  Unit drop down box    Background Color Specify a background color from the drop down list   Optionally  click Select to create a custom color    Gradient Select the Gradient checkbox to apply a gradient to  section header backgrounds in HMTL outputs  viewable in supported versions of Internet Explorer           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  269    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field Description                          Start Color Specify a gradient start color from the drop down  list     Optionally  click Select to create a custom color     End Color Specify a gradient end color from the drop down  list   Optionally  click Select to create a custom color     Orientation Specify the orientation of the gradient from the  drop down list     Border Color Specify a border color from the drop down list   Optionally  click Select to create a custom color     Specify the border width from the drop down list   Apply to Bottom Border Specify the style be appli
226. ng   162  replying   159  subscribing   160  viewing   157  document context    79  navigating on server   79  document cover page   81  viewing   81  document library   64  adding   76  browsing   79  managing    83  populating   76  documents   84  changing owner    89  managing    84  moving   91  republishing   132  dual mode functionality   331  dynamic website folders   119  122  125  E  editing   27  custom report   207  definition   176  during workflow   149  dynamic website folder   122  group   57  project   67  subscriptions   27  enabling   97  LMS   138  rich text in glossary   171  translated content   97  end user account   11  requesting   11  end user website   139  executing   355       368    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Index       migration run   339  transformation    330  337  355  359  360   361  Export   201  F  filtering   61  groups   61  finding   33  roles   30  52  53  54  user   33  folders   76  83  84  113  119  adding   76  deleting   84  managing    83  updating   83  font   266  formatting   177  definition   177  G  glossary   165  browsing   169  default language for definitions   172  disabling centralized   171  enabling centralized   170  settings   170  glossary import   193  glossary role   53  assigning user   53  group filter   61  delete   61  groups    30  55  60  61  creating   55  edit   57  filtering   61  updating   55  guided help   248  249  251  252  H  help   15  Oracle   302  304  325  help desk   36  history   130  queue 
227. ng Caption  Navigate Back Caption  Navigate Forward Caption  Pause Caption  Play Caption  Step Number Caption   Window Title Caption  Accessibility  Closed Caption          Menu item Caption   Open Caption  Options  Cance Caption  Close Caption  Save Caption  Seconds Caption  Timer Caption  Title Caption              5  Highlight a phrase in the phrase list     6  Click Select Phrase        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  251    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       7  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add   Select a language from the left   Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox     Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Guided Help  Mobile Device Publication Settings    1     2     From the editor  open the new template   Click Publications on the status bar   Selected Guided Help under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     Select Mobile Device Publication Settings from the drop down list     Mobile Device Publication Settings bd    Values     Os  Browser     ios Safari Vg  naa         Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a new operating Click Add   system browser configuration   Enter an operating system in the Operating System    field   Enter t
228. notifications  occur automatically  no setup is required to enable workflow notifications     Workflow notifications are sent via email     A reviewer s My Review List displays documents in workflow that are assigned to the reviewer   For more information  refer to Using the My Review List  on page 25      Viewing a Reviewer Notification    As the workflow progresses through the list of reviewers  each reviewer will receive an email  notifying him of a document awaiting review     The notification email subject line reads  You are needed to review the document   Document  Name    The email includes a hyperlink to the document     Viewing an Author Notification    When the workflow for a document is complete  the workflow creator will receive an email  notification of workflow completion  The email includes a hyperlink to the document        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  147    Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Updating a Workflow    You can update a workflow and its members  Documents that are already in workflow will not be  affected by an update     Updating a Workflow    1     2     Click Workflow on the left menu to display a list of existing workflows   Click on the name of the workflow to be updated    As desired  edit the name or description of the workflow    As desired  reorder the list of reviewers using the up and down arrows   To add or remove reviewers  click uPerform Users     Click Save        148    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Partic
229. ns  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       13  To add filters to the group  click Filters     g You must add a filter to the group in order to synchronize users with the uPerform  server  For more information on synchronization requirements  refer to Creating and  Managing Users Via User Information Source  on page 37      14  Select one or more filters from the Available Filters list   15  Click OK     16  Click OK     Editing a Group  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click Groups under Users  Roles  and Groups   58 Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group   Content Groups  EVANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users    f   Group 2    4  Click on the group you want to edit   5g Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group     Content Groups Selected Group      JANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users Name     Group 2    Group 1  Description    Users  o  Groups  o    Applied Filters     Ads    ean    gt Delete    T   vien users       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  57    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       5  Click Edit     Edit Content Group    Location  RWD uPerform Workspace All Users    Name  Admin Group    Applied Filters     6  Review complete the following fields     Field  Description          Edit the name for the group   Edit the description for the group     T  To edit users in the group  click uPerfor
230. nt  Consequently  the browser will remember your  selected menu setting between browser sessions     To collapse or expand the left menu  click the arrow icon below the website navigation buttons   When an end user displays context sensitive help  the left menu is always collapsed     Actions 1 J    Assign Website Context    Change Owner       Using Your Personal Page           te a Sales Order    Your personal page contains your personalized information     My Projects    My Review List     You have nothing to review     My Favorites     You have no favorites        My Alerts                               d to Sales by    The following lists are available on every author and administrator personal page        O My Projects  Displays links to all projects to which you have access  From this list   the website view of the project is also available     O My Review List  Displays content currently in a workflow assigned to you  The five    most recent links  based on the modification date  are displayed  To display all links     click More           24    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       O My Favorites  Displays links to content  discussions  or folders that you have added  to your list of favorites  The five most recent links  based on the modification date   are displayed  To display all links  click More       O My Alerts  Displays notifications about changes to content to which you have  subscribed  You can remove all or selected noti
231. nt Library Context area is available on each binder and cover page  This area provides a  hierarchical display of the content location in the document library  You can click on a hyperlink  in the displayed hierarchy to navigate to another location in the document library     Document Library Context    Collaboration Group Memory  gt  Acme ERP Implementation  gt  Document Library  gt  Intranet  gt  Sales Order Parti       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  79    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Viewing a Binder  1  Click izsitsita    2  Click on the name of the project in which the binder is stored   3  Click Document Library   4  Navigate to the folder in which the binder is stored     5  Click on the name of the binder you want to view      Sales Timesheet  uPerform Binder     Properties   Last Modified      3 21 07 2 32 PM  Last Modified By  Cindy Brovn  Translations    English  United States   en US   Sales Timesheet  Default     Group Assignments    Administrative Group   Document Library Context   Acme Corporation  gt  Acme Corp Project  gt  Documen t Library  gt  Sales  gt  Sales Timesheet  Related Documents    No related document selected    6  Review the following information on the cover page     Properties Contains the date and time of the most recent  modification and the name of the modifier    Translations Contains language of the content and  if applicable   associated translations    Group Assignments Contains the groups to which the binder has been  ass
232. nter the number of major versions to store on  the server  The number must be greater than 0     Remove additional versions now Select this option to remove excess major  versions  This option is available only if the  Maximum major versions to store field contains  a number greater than 0     This function permanently deletes non inclusive  versions from the database server     Allow Authors to Assign Website  Context    Select this option to allow authors to assign  website context for the documents in this project     Enable Anonymous Access Select this option to enable anonymous access    for the project     Allow Authors to Initiate Ad Hoc Select this option to allow an author to enable an  Workflows ad hoc workflow     Enable Assessment Score Tracking Select this option to enable assessment score  tracking for the project     Assessment scores are tracked for uPerform  courses and simulations with templates that have  SCORM 1 2 or SCORM 2004 packaging  enabled  For more information  refer to  Specifying New Template Settings  Publications           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  73    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Field Description                     Enable Content Editing and deleting Select this option to restrict check in  check out   only for owners and administrators delete  and rollback functionality to the owner or    administrator for content assigned to them     Enable Group Based Filtering Select this option to enable group based filtering  for t
233. nts     Activities During Document Transformation Processing    During transformation of your Info Pak documents  the Migration Wizard transforms the sections  of your Info Pak documents to the sections in a uPerform document  You specify the mapping of  sections between Info Pak and uPerform in the initial Migration Wizard configuration     After the Migration Wizard has completed the transformation processing  you can open the new  uPerform documents with the uPerform editor for quality assurance review and editing  In  particular  you must edit the procedure section in order to ensure your content displays properly  for publication  If you have content that contains a document and a simulation  it is recommended  that you edit in the simulation view  Finally  you can check the new uPerform documents into the  uPerform server in single or batch mode        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  337    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       If you previously checked in an Info Pak document for dual mode functionality and you then  transform this document and check it into the uPerform server  your Info Pak document is  replaced with the transformed document on the server  The resulting uPerform document receives  a new version designator  The website context assigned to the document and any associated  discussion content is retained with the transformed uPerform document     A After transformation  you should archive your Info Pak content library and  moving  forward  edit the uPe
234. o    Republish all documents Deselect Only add documents with an    approved     associated with the updated   status   template regardless of Q    An approved document is the most recent  version that has been sent to the  publishing queue by the project  administrator and has approved workflow  status     approval status    View a list of documents Click List Documents   associated with the updated    Only documents which require updating  template    will be listed        7  Click OK     Q Documents will be added to the publishing queue  For more information  refer to  Publishing Content for Display on the Website  on page 127         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  133    Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Subscribing to Publish Events    You can subscribe to be notified when the publish activity is complete  Subscription notices can  be delivered via your uPerform personal page  email message  or via both methods     Subscribing to a Publish Event    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click Publishing in the Server Administration area    Click Subscribe on the left menu     Select one or more of the following options     Post notifications to my Select this option to receive your subscription  Personal Page  notification in the My Alerts section of your  uPerform personal page     Send notifications in an email   Select this option to receive your subscription    report to
235. oject progress and status  you can execute several  standard reports from the ANCILE uPerform server  In addition to the  provided document tracking  workflow status  and published content  report  you can also create and execute custom reports        197    Chapter 10  Using Reports          Introduction to Reporting    Reports are used to track project progress and activity within the uPerform server  Reports can be  generated for uPerform and managed documents  Once a report is generated  the results can be  exported or viewed online  Four standard reports are available within the uPerform server     m        g    Assessment Performance   Displays a detailed report for courses and assessments  assigned to a project  Assessment scores are tracked for uPerform courses and  simulations with templates that have SCORM 1 2 or SCORM 2004 packaging  enabled  For more information  refer to Specifying New Template Settings   Publications     Document Tracking   Displays a detailed report of the documents assigned to a  project    Published Content   Displays a detailed report of the published documents assigned to  a project    Workflow Status   Displays a detailed report of the document workflows assigned to  a project    System administrators have access to all reports  Project administrators have access only to  reporting functionalities within a project for which they are the administrator     You can create a copy of a standard report and modify the copy using the Save As funct
236. olders   This method automatically  populates your website using properties stored in the uPerform document  By  planning your hierarchy  and assigning values to properties within your template  you  can manage a multi dimensional website that updates based on your published or  republished content  If you plan to include web and managed documents in your  dynamic website folders  you can assign templates using the instructions found in  Editing Properties for a Managed or Web Document  on page 88   This method is  well suited for a larger end user community and a large number of documents     If you are using optional group based filtering  this option will affect the way content is displayed  on the website  For more information on group based filtering and working with groups  refer to  Creating and Updating Groups  on page 55      Q Within the website view  you will be linking to content in the document library   Content is not copied or moved to achieve display in the website        112    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Building the Website via Context Assignment    After creating a project and populating the document library view  you are ready to create the  website structure  In most training rollouts  the website structure is often based on your planned  curriculum design     Building the website via context assignment allows you to manually organize your website by  assigning context to document library content  A website fold
237. oles  and Groups       3  Click Groups under Users  Roles  and Groups   58 Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group    Content Groups    EIANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users    Group 2    4  Click on the group whose users you want to view   5s Groups    Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group     Content Groups Selected Group    EJANCILE uPerform Workspace   4 40 0 11 All Users    Name  Group 1     Description   Group 2  Users  o  Groups  o    Applied Filters     badd  Bedit   9 Delete      view users    5  Click View Users     Q If more than 100 000 users are present in the group  the View Users button is disabled     Synchronizing Groups    Q Synchronizing from the Groups page will synchronize all user sources and filters  For    more information on user source  refer to Creating and Managing Users Via User  Information Source  on page 37      1  Click Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click Groups under Users  Roles  and Groups     Actions      synchronize 9g Groups   REERQUUUUUUUUUUUUUUT Click on a content group to add  edit  or delete a group   Areas aros group     My Account    Content Groups       EIRWD uPerform Workspace All Users    Acme ERP Group    4  Click Synchronize on the left menu     5  Click OK        60 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Assigning Content to a Group    g You must first enable
238. olutions  Inc  25    Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       Using the My Favorites List    Your My Favorites list displays content you have bookmarked  To create a favorite to display in  the list     1  Navigate to the content item  discussion  or folder that you want to bookmark     2  Click Add to My Favorites on the left menu to add the favorite to the list on your personal  page     Using the My Alerts List    Your My Alerts list displays links to content to which you have subscribed  If you want to receive  notifications about changes to content or folders in uPerform  you can subscribe to the object   Changes made to the content will initiate a message being sent to the subscriber     You can select how you are notified of changes  via email or via a link on your personal page     The document author is automatically subscribed to documents  and the related discussions  the  author adds to the server  This notification is sent via email and a link on your personal page     Subscribing to Content  1  Navigate to the content item  discussion  or folder to which you want to subscribe     2  Click Subscribe on the left menu     Subscribe To Help Launchpad    A subscription to this folder vill notify you when items are created in  added to  or removed from this folder  or when the folder itself is edited or deleted     How to be notified     a    Mf Post notifications to my Personal Page       Send notifications in an email report to rebecca jenshakGancile com  Add
239. omplete the following information     Field  Description   uPerform server location Enter the URL of your uPerform server   Username Enter the username for the uPerform server   Password Enter the password for the uPerform server     Trust invalid SSL certificates    Select this option if you are using SSL but your  certificate is not signed     Use Proxy Authentication Click the Use Proxy Authentication checkbox if   optional  your administrator has set up a proxy server for  connecting to the uPerform server     Username Enter the username for the proxy authentication   Password Enter the password for the proxy authentication     Test Connection Click Test Connection to test your connection to  the uPerform server     Q Upon exiting the application  connection information is stored for future use in the  Migration Wizard Application Settings XML file located on the local computer in  C  Users  lt USER gt  AppData Roaming ANCILE Migration Wizard Version  4 5X AppSettings xml        7  Click Next          e Migration  Step 3  uPerform Project and Template    Specify the uPerform project and template to be used     uPerform Project  Acme Migration    uPerform Template      Becky Migration Template  uct       8  Complete the following fields     Field  Description     0 0    uPerform Project Select the project that contains the template you  want to update        uPerform Template Select the template you want to update with the  transformation        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  349 
240. on  Authors can publish locally to preview content  and administrators manage the server  publish queue to make content available to users     Recorder  The uPerform functionality that captures author actions in one or more target applications to  produce a formatted document  simulation  and screenflow     Simulation  A set of instructions  images  and associated objects intended for export as interactive output     Skin  The skin files define the style of the uPerform interface elements  Using skins  you can change the  colors of the interface areas  set new fonts properties  use different images for icons in the  interface  etc     Student Guide    A collection of concepts  procedures  and exercises related to a series of tasks or a process     Suggestion  A proposed alternate definition entered by an author for evaluation as a potential new glossary  definition        364 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Glossary of Terms       Template  A set of document  simulation  and course options that control formatting and content  Each  content file is created from a template which determines the basic structure for content and  specifies the content settings  The template also specifies information about the types and formats  of content that can be published     Term  The name of a field or option in the target application being documented  A term can have one or  more definitions     Transformation  The process of converting Info Pak documents to uPerform documents     Translation  u
241. on message  cstephens rwd com     age will be sent to these people from cste        Subject     FYI  4 10 Build 10 Test Project        Message Content   add your own content as desired     4 10 Build 10 Test Project  can be  at    http   uperformtraining rwduperform com gm cabinet   1 25 101     v ok  cancel    3  Complete the following information     Field  Description         0    Enter one or more recipient email addresses     If you specify multiple email addresses  separate  each with a comma     To specify users from the uPerform address book     click uPerform Users     Subject As desired  modify the default email subject text     Message Content As desired  provide additional text to the email  body           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  163    Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content       4  Tocopy yourself on the message  select the Copy yourself on message checkbox     5  Click OK        164 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary    ANCILE uPerform allows you to maintain a centralized database of  terms and definitions used in procedural content  This glossary  functionality ensures authors are using consistent and approved  definitions     Authors can retrieve definitions and suggest alternate definitions   Administrators manage the glossary settings  including the use of rich     text formatting in definitions and the tracking of term usage     The glossary functionality is available only in procedural content        165    Chapter 9  Working with 
242. on the left menu     Add a New Document          Description   Language  English  United States   en US        Select a file     Browse  Free text    8  File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table  a w 4 7 Ra ag    e a  e  Normal y   Verdana v 1z  03t    B Z U    amp  x xmi  E E  Sp la  Design   Code   Mss can    6  Complete the following information     Field   Description   Name The default name is the name of the document  If  desired  edit the name of the document    Description Enter amplifying information about the managed  document    Language Select the appropriate language for the new  document  The default is your website default  language     7  Perform one of the following     If you want to    Select a file  default  To check in a file  click Select a file and click  Browse     to locate and select the managed       document to upload     Free Text To add an HTML document  click Free Text  Enter  text and format using the rich text editor toolbar  controls        kei You must have Java version 6 installed to enable uPerform s rich text editor     8  Click Save        86 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Updating a Managed Document    1        Select the managed document     If you want to    Edit and upload a new file Click Get Latest Version   Select Lock   Edit and save the document   Click Check In   Select the appropriate version number     Click Browse       Navigate to the new version of the managed  document     Clic
243. ontext sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from the uPerform server via a  direct link in the Internet Explorer 7  8  or 9 application     End users will need to install the uPerform_CSH msi plug in on their computers  which is  located in the uPerform server folder   install  Collaboration WWW ANCILEHIp  or you can  push the installation out via a system management server  SMS      End users with the 64 bit version of Internet Explorer must install the uPerform_CSH_x64 msi  plug in to use generic context sensitive help  Both the 32 bit and 64 bit versions can be installed  side by side     9    Installing the uPerform CSH  x64 msi plug in will not install context sensitive help  into the default 32 bit version of Internet Explorer     Creating the Help Link for Web Pages Using Internet Explorer    1     2     Close all instances of Internet Explorer     Copy the uPerform CSH msi or uPerform CSH  x64 msi file to your end user desktop  from the WWWAANCILEHIp folder     Double click on the uPerform CSH msi or uPerform CSH  x64 msi package   Click Next    Click Next    Click Next    Optionally  select a language  The default is English US    Enter the server URL  from the connection profile      Click OK     10  Click Finish        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  323    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       11  Launch Internet Explorer     12  Click the Help icon  or s
244. or more times as needed        Move the section later in the list Select the section   Click Move Down one or more times as needed     4  Click FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  279    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates          Export and Import an Author Template    ANCILE uPerform allows users to import and export author template phrases via the XML  Localization Interchange File Format  XLIFF  for translating template content in to multiple  languages  When a template is exported  one XLIFF file will be created for each language  When  a template is imported  it is updated to contain the translated phrases     The file is formatted to facilitate translation by displaying the source  original  text co located  next to the target translated text     Q9 The XLIFF file can be edited in Notepad  in an HTML editor  or via a specialized  XLIFF editor such as Xliff Editor or Heartsome     Exporting Template Content  1  Select FILE   MANAGE CONTENT LANGUAGE     2  Select Export  template name      Export  HRudt LZ       S F HR  HR udt    F Bahasa Indonesia  Indonesia   JF catal    catal        e  tina    esk   republika    F dansk  Danmark   7 Deutsch  Deutschland    F English  United Kingdom   JF English  United States   espa  ol  Espa  a   JF fran  ais  Canada    7 fran  ais  France    7 hrvatski  Hrvatska   JF italiano  Italia   magyar  Magyarorsz  g    F Nederlands  Belgi       Nederlands  Nederland      F polski  Polska    Portugu  s  Brasil    p
245. orkflow  1  Click Workflow on the left menu to display a list of existing workflow groups     2  Click New Workflow     Create Workflow    Description     Documents assigned with this workflow group will be circulated a  approvers in the order they appear above  Use th  vi  reorder the workflow queue     3  Enter the following information     Field   Description  Enter the name of the workflow group     Description Enter optional amplifying information about the  workflow    Click uPerform Users to add users to the workflow  group        4  After selecting the users  use the up and down arrows to the right of the Members list to set  the sequence of reviewers in the approval process     5  Click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  145    Chapter 7  Using Workflow       Starting a Workflow    1  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Click Start Workflow on the left menu     Start Workflow    Set up document approvers          Use selected approval group     ACme Workflow             Use individual approvers added below   Approvers are processed in the order they are listed  Use the arrow buttons to move an approver up or down the queue             f uPerform Users             The approval process will begin when this form is submitted  When it becomes an approver s turn to review the document  email prompts that person to respond        Automatically pu
246. orm document  Select the checkbox es  in the uPerform Document  to convert to PDF  area to enable conversion to PDF  Simulation   Simulation  HTML  HTML  PowerPoint  or Word    PowerPoint  or Word     Enable Word   doc  to Select the checkbox es  in the Word   doc  area to  convert to PDF  Source  or enable conversion to PDF  Source  or HTML   HTML    Enable Word   docx  to Select the checkbox es  in the Word   docx  area to  convert to PDF  Source  or enable conversion to PDF  Source  or HTML   HTML    Enable Excel   xls  to convert   Select the checkbox es  in the Excel   xls  area to  to PDF or Source enable conversion to PDF or Source    Enable Excel   xlsx  to Select the checkbox es  in the Excel   xlsx  area to  convert to PDF or Source enable conversion to PDF or Source    Enable PowerPoint   ppt  to   Select the checkbox es  in the PowerPoint   ppt   convert to PDF or Source area to enable conversion to PDF or Source   Enable PowerPoint   pptx  to   Select the checkbox in the PowerPoint   pptx  area  convert to Source to enable conversion to Source     5  Click Save           128 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Publishing Content from the Server    The uPerform server can be configured to automatically publish content in the publish queue daily  at off peak hours  Content is automatically placed in the queue when 1  you add content to the  publish queue  2  the content has completed workflow and the workflow includes the option to  
247. orm server   For more information  refer to Viewing uPerform Server Product  Information  on page 15     Add to My Favorites Select this option to add the current content  folder  or discussion to    your list of favorites  Your favorites are displayed in the My Favorites  list on your personal page     For more information  refer to Using the My Favorites List  on page  25      Subscribe Unsubscribe Select this option to receive or stop alerts regarding changes to the  current content  folder  or discussion  Your alerts are displayed in the  My Alerts list on your personal page     For more information  refer to Using the My Favorites List  on page  25      Edit Subscription Select this option to specify preferences for receiving subscription  notifications     Tell Others Select this option to send specified users a link to the current content   folder  or discussion   For more information  refer to Using the Tell Others Feature  on page  163            ANCILE Solutions  Inc  23    Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       Expanding and Collapsing the Left Menu    Um     qus    Add Me to Select the option to participate in author or website discussions     Discussion Remove Me from   For more information  refer to Subscribing to a Discussion  see    Discussion        Subscribing to a Folder or Discussion  on page 160      The display of the left menu can be collapsed to increase available screen real estate  The setting  for the left menu is linked to the user s accou
248. ors  and go to Step 5   System Administrators role    Add a user to the uPerform Click on uPerform Glossary Administrators  and go to Step 5   Glossary Administrators role    Add a user to the uPerform   Click on uPerform Publishing Administrators  and go to Step 5   Publishing Administrators  role       5  Click uPerform Users    6  Click All Users    7T  Click on the first letter of the last name of the desired user or use the search functionality   8  Select the user name    9  Click Add Selected    10  Click OK     11  Click Save     Modifying a Role  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   3  Click uPerform Roles in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Click on the role you want to modify     5  Select uPerform Users to display and select the role members        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  53    Chapter 4     Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          6  Perform one of the following actions   If You Want To  Add a new user to the role Refer to Assigning a User to the uPerform  System  Glossary  or Publishing Administrator  Roles  on page 53    Delete a user from the role Click uPerform Users   Go to Step 7   7T  Select the user from the Selected list   8  Click Remove   Q Optionally  click Remove All to remove all users from the role   9  Click OK   10  Click Save   Finding a Role  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   3  Click uPerform Roles
249. ortugu  s  Portugal    rom  n    Romania    JF suomi  Suomi     7 svenska  Sverige   T  rk  e  T  rkiye     7 envi EM    a     F Genrapcias  Benrapna        Export to   C UsersJusemame  Documents m  Cancel    l                3  Select the target export language s      Q9  Multiple languages can be selected  Click the checkbox beside the template name to  select all languages     4  Click Export        280 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       5  Optionally  select     to specify a destination folder other than the default   Only the template will be exported  Any depending uPerform content will not be  represented in the output     6  Click Export      Exporting summay            5 HRud    HR udt phrase de DExf    HR udt phrase en US             7  Click OK     Importing Template Content  1  Select FILE   MANAGE CONTENT LANGUAGE     2  Select Import  template name      Import  HR udt    k    5 4 HR  HR udt    F Deutsch  Deutschland   7 Engish  United States        Import from        C  Users  usemame  Documents        mro erm          3  Select the template and language s  to import        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  281    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Click Import      importing summar 0        a HRud    HR  udt phrase de DExi      HR  udt  phrase  en US xf                5  Click OK     Q The template is now updated to include the translated phrases  and will be included in  content using that template        282 ANCILE Solutions  Inc
250. ot want to leverage a standard skin delivered with uPerform  you can create a custom   skin    1  Copy an existing skin from the  uPerform installation  Client appdata skins  Course or  Sim   uPerform folder    2  Paste the skin to the  uPerform installation  Client appdata skins  Course or Sim  custom  folder    3  Rename the skin  the folder name   For example  Custom Skin 001   4  Modify the skin css located in the  uPerform installation  Client appdata skins  Course or    Sim  custom  renamed skin  skin folder        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  287    Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files          Managing Custom Skins    Managing Local Custom Skins    1  In the editor  select FILE  gt  MANAGE LOCAL CUSTOM SKINS          r  Manage Local Custom Skins       Skins   Name  4 50 course skin sap spp  Default   Logo Left  Default   Logo Right  Gala  Midnight  Onyx   Rounded   Rounded edit   skin   Square   Square edit             Selected  skin  Version  2 0        Type   Course  Course  Course  Course  Course  Course  Course  Course  Course       Course  Course       Import       Export        Remove       Check in_                                 Q Custom skins that exist on the uPerform server and are not already present on the  current user s system are automatically downloaded   Q If you download a custom skin while connected to the server  the uPerform client will    perform a check of the local custom skin against the downloaded skin  If the local copy  has be
251. ou receive  password information sent via email     Adding a User Information Source from a File Source    1  Click Administration on the left menu     2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click User Information Source in the Users  Roles  and Groups area        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     39    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       4     5     9     Click Add User Source on the left menu   Enter a name for the source in the Name field   Enter a description of the source in the Description field     Select File from the source drop down list                       Edit User Information Source  Location  LDAP   acmeds com 389  Page Size  500  Security Connection    5 Simple    Requires user distinguished name and password   User ID jdoe acmegs com  Password  Password Confirmation   Anonymous  Field Mapping uPerform Fields Fields  User ID sAMAccountName  Unique Identifier distinguishedName  Email Address mail  First Name GivenName  Last Name  V  Enable Automatic Synchronization  Send Account Created Notifications  4 Previous  bal        Field Description          Upload a file    Connect to a file over HTTP    Field Mapping       Select the Upload File Path radio button  and  select Browse     to navigate to the file location     Go to Step 10   Select Connect to a File and complete the  following fields     Path  Enter the static path for the file to which  you want to connect     User ID  Enter the User ID that has access to the  file 
252. ount as described in  Specifying an Author Account for Oracle E   Business     Revisit the screens in the application for which  you want to provide context sensitive help  and  click on the help icon on each screen captured in  the recorded document     This will open up a new browser  window containing the context  identifier for the screen     Highlight and copy the context identifier string  from the browser window     Repeat until context identifiers for all screens  within the procedure have been collected     Go to Step 4        296    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       If You Want To    Provide context sensitive help using Perform the steps described in Modifying the  SAP SRM version 4 6 Workplace Integration API     Revisit the screens in the application for which  you want to provide context sensitive help  and  click on the help icon on each screen captured in  the recorded document     Highlight and copy the context identifier string  from the browser window     Repeat until context identifiers for all screens    within the procedure have been collected   Go to Step 4     Provide context sensitive help using If iView Portal page IDs are not automatically   SAP EP  SAP CRM Web Client  SAP   collected  enable and include the iView Portal   SRM version 7  SAP GUI for Page IDs as needed  Refer to Enabling the   Windows  SAP HTML GUI  Siebel  Required iView Portal Page Options  on page   PeopleSoft 9  and generic web pages 306   Locating
253. owser window that displays on top of the SAP EP application     Context sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from the uPerform server via a  direct link in the SAP EP application     When creating custom Help links in an application that will be hosted in an iView  consider using  an approach similar to that used in the context sensitive solution for the iView itself     C  Assign a unique identifier to each Help link  Recall that each iView in an SAP EP  system has a unique alphanumeric identifier  for example    com sap portal createNewUser   that can be used as a reliable link between an iView  and its related help content  Each custom Help link should also have a unique  identifier that can be included in the properties of applicable uPerform documents     CJ Include the unique Help link identifier in uPerform documents  uPerform allows the  author to specify the iView ID s  to which the document applies  The Help link  unique identifier should also be specified in the document     Enabling the Required iView Portal Page Options    To enable end users to access context sensitive help for an iView portal page  the Help option  must be enabled  Each iView portal page Help option is disabled by default  however  an SAP EP  user with the appropriate permission to edit an iView portal page can enable the Help option via  the Property Editor     Each iView and po
254. p     9  Click Save     Removing Related Content  1  Click  Qsissis  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library   4  Select the folder containing the file for which you want to remove a relationship     5  Click Edit Related Documents in the left navigation page   Edit Related Documents   amp  B9 Document Library  E  BI Human Resources      HR  E  sales Division  Related Documents    Document t Library  gt  Sales Division  gt  Sales    6  Inthe tree view  expand the folder that contains the relationship you want to remove   7  Deselect the checkbox es  next to the relationship you want to remove     8  Click Save        100 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Using Version History    A version history is maintained for uPerform content  The version history for uPerform content  can be viewed from either the editor or server  The version history for a managed document can  be viewed from the server only  All versions of a document are listed chronologically  For more  information on using version history with the editor  refer to  Using Version History  in the  companion manual Creating Content with ANCILE uPerform     You can also revert  or rollback  to an earlier version of content from the server workspace  This  action sets the latest version of a file to the previous version of the file     Viewing the Version History from the Server    1     2     Click i amp   sisss  in the uPe
255. p user interface   The style to be used for the link text     Page Description Text The style to be used for the page description text   Page Title Text The style to be used for the page title text     Screen Caption The style to be used for the captions displayed above  screen captures in a document    Section Name The style to be used for sections displayed in your  document     Table of Contents Heading 1    The style to be used for the levels within the table of  6 contents     Table Text The style to be used for the table text   Top Navigation Text The style to be used for the top navigation text  displayed in a uPerform course     9  Click Modify        10  Click Select Phrase        268 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       11  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add     Select a language from the left     Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        12  Complete the following fields   Q  Depending on the style selected  some of the following options may not be displayed     Field  Description        1    Click Select to choose a font    Font Color Select a font color from the drop down list   Optionally  click Select to create a custom color    Effects Click the checkbox es  next to Bold  U
256. perties in the task pane   6  Edit the name in the Name field   7  Optionally  enter a description in the Description field     8  Select a uPerform template from the Template listbox     Selecting a template allows you to add a transaction code  and to associate uPerform template  properties within the template to your web or managed document  For more information on  template properties  refer to Specifying New Template Settings  Properties  on page 224         88 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Changing the Document Owner    The system administrator has permission to change the owner of a document individually or in  bulk  The new owner of a document is automatically subscribed to the document     Q The Bulk Change Owner option is only available at the project level     1  Click    siss   in the uPerform server workspace     2  Click on the project name     3  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Change the document owner for a  single document    Change the document owner for all  documents in a project    4  Click Save     Deleting Content       Click Document Library     Navigate to the folder containing the document  to be edited     Click on the name of the binder containing the  content     In the Translations section  click on the  document to go to the cover page     Click Change Owner on the left menu    Click uPerform Users to locate and specify the  new owner    Click Bulk Change Owner on the lef
257. projects created by the system administrator  Each  project contains the following two folders     O Document library       O Website    Within the document library and website areas  you implement a custom hierarchy for your  authors and end users  respectively     In addition to these two areas  each project has one or more assigned templates  A template can be  used on multiple projects     The following is an illustration of a typical project setup in uPerform     4 Acme Development Project  Project     Training development for the Acme implementation   Document Library  1   Development team s space   Website  0     End user s space     Templates    2 AcmeProjectTemplate udt    Creating a Project    1  Log into the uPerform server via a web browser   2  Click imis     3  Click New Project on the left menu     Create a New Project    Project Name     Project Description   Document Library Description     Website Description        66 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       4  Complete the following information     Field  Description  Project Name Enter the name of the project     Project Description Enter amplifying information about the project and  its purpose     Document Library Enter a description of the library associated with the   Description project    Website Description Enter a description of the website associated with  the project     5  Click Save to display the project cover page        Editing a Project  1  Log into the 
258. r Templates          Introduction to Author Templates    A key capability of uPerform is the ability to allow administrators to establish and enforce  standards through the use of author templates  Author templates contain configuration and style  settings to control the appearance and content of your training materials  Templates help you to  enforce consistency via these predetermined formatting and configuration settings  Consistent  formatting enables your users to quickly and easily find information in all content     Author templates provide control over the following elements     M    g          Sections   represents a single  contiguous group of blocks in a document     Blocks   a content element containing the information required to render a discrete  item in all available views     Styles   a group of formatting options that relate to paragraphs or character text   Publications   a designator indicating content output     Phrases   a group of culture specific boilerplate text items that are placed into a block  by default     uPerform Properties   metadata such as document title  owner  and version used to  describe content     Image  Data  and Language Management   allows you to control images  data fields   and languages associated with a template     Info Pak Properties   allows you to view a list of document types  content location   and websafe paths of migrated ANCILE Info Pak documents     You can edit author templates via the uPerform editor        212    A
259. r the uPerform server   Password Enter the password for the uPerform server     Select Trust invalid SSL Select this option if you are using SSL but your  certificates  certificate is not signed     Use Proxy Authentication Click the Use Proxy Authentication checkbox if   optional  your administrator has set up a proxy server for  connecting to the uPerform server     Username Enter the username for the proxy authentication   Password Enter the password for the proxy authentication           356 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       7  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Transformation       Migration    Step 3  uPerform Project and Template  Specify the uPerform project and template to be used     uPerform Project   J          uPerform Template     Acme Migration udt  v    pm Previous       8  Select the project from the uPerform Project list     9  Select a template from the uPerform Template list     Q9 Only those templates containing Info Pak properties needed to perform a  transformation are displayed  For more information  refer to Migrating Info Pak  Documents to the uPerform Document Library  on page 347      10  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Transformation     Migration    Step 4  Transform Info Pak Documents  Transform Info Pak documents and simulations into uPerform documents     Browse            11  Complete the following information   Field  Description         Inbox Browse to the location of your Info Pak documents  
260. r to the  companion manual ANCILE uPerform Administration     The server workspace is accessed via a standard web browser  Your home page within the  workspace is called your personal page        18 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace          Using the Server Workspace    Your uPerform personal page is divided into three main areas   O The top banner  Contains search functionality     O The left menu  Contains navigation buttons and options pertinent to your current  location and system access in uPerform        O Your personalized content area  Displays your favorites list  projects to which you are  assigned  any workflow items requiring your attention  and a list of alerts received as  a result of subscribing to content            ANCILE    sU             My Projects       M cnr Regulations           was added    to Sales Timeshe  M purchase Orders on 6 29 11 11 43 AM       sales Timesheets       st was added to RJ ManageDocTest  Document Library  by Rebecca     on 6 23 11 6 16 PM    Mg Remove Marked   fgg Remove All  Personalized Content Area        Using the Top Banner    The top banner provides access to search functionality to allow you to execute a quick search  using one or more words or a document type  Advanced searches can be performed within a  project  Search results include a hyperlink to the found object s   The uPerform search engine  incorporates stemming to maximize search results  In other words  when you search for the wor
261. r workspace     Q9 The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Click I do not Approve in the Workflow area of the window     3  Complete the following information     Field  Description     0 0    Enter any email address es  in addition to previous  approvers and authors  or click Collaboration Users  to select users from a list     Subject Edit the default subject text  as necessary        As desired  add information to the default message  text     4  Click OK     Q When a document is rejected  all users in the notification To field receive an email  informing them of the rejection        150 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 7  Using Workflow          Stopping a Workflow and Deleting a Workflow    Authors and administrators can stop a workflow  Reviewers who have completed their review are  notified via email  Restarting the workflow begins with the first reviewer     Deleting a workflow is not the same as stopping a workflow  Deleted workflows cannot be  recovered     Stopping a Workflow    1  Go to the document cover page in the server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     2  Click Stop Workflow on the left menu     Stop Workflow    Inform approvers who have already received the document for review      Click here to launch your email client  To   separate multiple email addresses with commas     An email message will be sent to
262. ransforming Info Pak Documents  see  Transforming Info Pak Documents and Simulations   on page 355      Migrating Info Pak Documents to the uPerform Document Library    A This activity does not migrate Web Architect or Glossary data  If the Web Architect  database has already been migrated  documents will be checked into the correct  location in uPerform  otherwise  the documents will be checked into the project root     1  Select START  gt  PROGRAMS  gt  ANCILE UPERFORM  gt  MIGRATION WIZARD to open the  Migration Wizard     2  Review the prerequisites and  optionally  specify the interface language   3  Click Next   4  Select Batch check in Info Pak documents     5  Click Next     6  Complete the following information     Field        Description  Enter the URL of your uPerform server   Username Enter the username for the uPerform server     Enter the password for the uPerform server     Use Proxy Authentication  optional  Click the Use Proxy Authentication checkbox    if your administrator has set up    proxy server  for connecting to the uPerform server     Trust Invalid SSL Certificates Select this option if you are using SSL but your  certificate is not signed     Username Enter the username for the proxy authentication     Password Enter the password for the proxy authentication        7  Click Next        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  347    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       8  Select a project from the uPerform Project drop down list     9  Click Next   10  C
263. rary  on page 347      7T  Click OK     Q This process may take several minutes     8  Edit the document using the procedures and information found in Reviewing and Editing  Transformed Info Pak Documents  see  Reviewing and Editing Transformed Documents and  Simulations  on page 360         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  359    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Reviewing and Editing Transformed Documents and Simulations    Once you have transformed an Info Pak document or simulation to a uPerform document or  simulation  you must review the document to ensure proper formatting and content display  After  transformation  your content will be displayed using uPerform styles     Reviewing and Editing Transformations    Q The following styles are lost when converting Info Pak documents  character scale   outline  shading  and doublestrike     The following list provides information on areas that may need particular attention     A Highly customized Info Pak documents will require more extensive quality reviews   Highly customized documents include  but are not limited to manually inserted tables  and steps  an extensive Info Pak glossary  and notes inserted after screenshots     m        Hotspots  During transformation  hot spot images are located and an image of the    hotspot  for example  SEHE  is placed into the document to help you determine the  hotspot location  If you are working with content that contains a document and a  simulation  the hotspot should be edi
264. rating Info Pak Content       14  Complete review the following information     Field  Description                    Web Architect Profile Browse to the location of your Web Architect pro   file     Profile  xml files are typically stored in the follow   ing locations     For Windows XP  C  Documents and Settings  Your  Username  My Documents Info pak profiles wa    For Windows Vista and Windows 7  C  Users Docu   ments Info pak profiles wa     Content URL Enter the web server location of your published Info  Pak content  The Migration Wizard does not  validate URLs     For example  http    Install  Location  collaboration www ipcontent     Profile Settings Review the settings for your Web Architect profile  to ensure they are correct     15  Click Next           Migration Wizard   Migration DER      Migration    Step 6  Document Library Structure  Specify how the documents will be organized for authors within the uPetform server        Directory Structure     Document Properties     grove m       16  Choose from the following options     If You Want To    Build the document library based on Select the Directory Structure radio button  and  directory structure go to Step 19        Build the document library based on Select the Document Properties radio button   document properties and go to Step 17     17  Select the properties to use from the Properties Available list  and click  gt  gt  to move these  properties into the Properties Selected list on the right  Use the up an
265. ration    3  Select Integration Settings under Server Administration    4  Select Context Sensitive Help Connection Profiles under Integration Settings     5  Select the connection profile   I Oracle 12 Conn    Application  Orade 12   Applications Help Web Agent Profile Setting  httpi  dev rwduperform com gm 1 11 38201  Applications Help Web Agent Profile Setting for Authors  http   dev rwduperform cor RWDHIp authorMode htrnl  Base Help URL  httpi  g4korapp dev400D rudtech corn 8001 OA HTML     Browser Settings    Width  40  Height  80  Location  Right    Stay On Top  IE Only   No       302 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       6  Review the following system generated values     Field  Description              This value is pasted into the Applications Help  Web Agent profile setting for the end user in  Oracle E Business  This value is generated by  uPerform and is not configurable     Applications Help Web Agent Profile  Setting    Application Help Web Agent Profile  Setting for Authors    Refer to Modifying Oracle E Business End User  Accounts for Use with Context Sensitive Help   on page 303  for information on using this value  to modify end user accounts in Oracle     This value is pasted into the Application Help  Web Agent profile setting for the designated  author in Oracle E Business  This value is  generated by uPerform and is not configurable        7  Copy the URL from the Applications Help Web Agent Profile Settings for Authors field
266. ration area       g Glossary Configuration       V  Enable Glossary          V  Allow Rich Text in Definitions             Default Language for Definitions     English  United States  v    4  Select the Enable Glossary checkbox     5  Click Save        170    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Disabling the Centralized Glossary    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click Glossary in the Server Administration area    Deselect the Enable Glossary checkbox     Click Save     Enabling Rich Text in Definitions    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area     Click Glossary in the Server Administration area       g Glossary Configuration       7  Enable Glossary                7  Allow Rich Text in Definitions       Default Language for Definitions     English  United States  m    Select the Allow Rich Text in Definitions checkbox     Click Save     Disabling Rich Text in Definitions    1     2     Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   Click Server Administration in the Administration area    Click Glossary in the Server Administration area    Deselect the Allow Rich Text in Definitions checkbox     Click Save        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  171    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Setting the Default Language for Definitions  1  C
267. rding your subscription via email and or your personal page     An owner is automatically subscribed to the author and website discussions associated with  content created by the owner     Subscribing to a Folder or Discussion    1  Go to the folder in the server workspace     2  Select one of the following options to subscribe to the folder     If You Want To    Add to your favorites located on the Click Add To My Favorites   server home page      To remove from your favorites  click My  Favorites on the Home page and then click  Delete      Subscribe to the folder to receive a Click Subscribe on the left menu     notification when messages are posted   Specify your desired personal page notification    options   Click OK      To unsubscribe from the folder  click  Unsubscribe on the left menu  Then  click OK         3  Select one of the following options to subscribe to a discussion   If You Want To    Subscribe to an Author or Website Go to Step 4   Discussion    Subscribe to a folder level discussion       Navigate to the discussion cover page     Click Subscribe on the left menu      To unsubscribe from the discussion  click  Unsubscribe on the left menu  Then  click OK         4  Navigate to the document cover page in the folder or server workspace     Q The document cover page for uPerform content is located within the Translations area  of the binder     5  Scroll down to the Author Discussion or Website Discussion area of the window        160 ANCILE Solutions  Inc  
268. re the section is used in the This item is used by the items below area        10  Click FILE  gt  SAVE to specify additional sections        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     277    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Modifying  Duplicating  and Deleting Sections    1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click Sections on the status bar        pupone  7 ASAP BPP  Configuration Infomation UOLUNT Configuration Information  Test Information Data Sheet    ASAP BPP    Exercise Data Sheet    Screen Flow c Test Information  Procedure    Result    TTE    SIISTISTTSTIE IT ISTISIT                   General Properties Phrases Publications Styles Blocks   Sections  Ready    3  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Modify a section Select the section from the Manage All Sections  list in the content pane     Click Modify   For information on modifying a section  refer to  Specifying Sections  on page 276      Duplicate a section Select the section from the content area  and    click Duplicate     The duplicated section is added below the  original section  Modify the property to specify a  new name and characteristics  For information   refer to Specifying Sections  on page 276      Delete a section Select the section from the content area  and  click Delete     At the prompt  click Yes           278    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       If You Want To    Move a section earlier in the list Select the section   Click Move Up one 
269. re your page size is within that range   If the directory server does not use paging  enter        A Page size should not be set if the  directory server does not provide an  estimated number of results     Security Connection Select the Simple or Anonymous radio button     If you choose simple  enter the user name and  password of the user to use to connect to the  directory server           42 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapier 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       8  Go to Step 10     Edit User Information Source    Name  Acme File Source       Locitiont   Upload File Path    Field Mapping    Connect to a file over HTTP    TRITT    Browse            serID accountInfo userID  Unique Identifier  Email Address  First Name    Last Name       uPerform Fields Fields    guid  accountInfor  email    firstName       lastName          J  Enable Automatic Synchronization        Send Account Created Notifications    9  Choose from the following options     if You Want To    Upload a file    Select Upload File Path  and select Browse     to  navigate to the file location     Select Connect to a File  and complete the  following fields     Path  Enter the static path for the file to which  you want to connect     User ID  Enter the User ID that has access to the  file     Password  Enter the password for the user        Password Confirmation  Confirm the password    10  Complete the following fields     Feld  Description          Field Mapping    User ID  For a directory server  ent
270. rform documents        338 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Executing a Migration Run    The Migration Wizard is available from the Microsoft Windows Start menu  The Migration  Wizard interface is available in all languages supported by uPerform     The Migration Wizard will gather information at each step for use in future steps  but no data will  be migrated until the Wizard is completed     Uploading All Info Pak Data Into uPerform  1  Create an ipcontent folder in the  Install Location  collaboration www  location   2  Place your published Info Pak content into the ipcontent folder     3  Select START  gt  PROGRAMS  gt  ANCILE UPERFORM  gt  MIGRATION WIZARD to open the  migration wizard        Migration Wizard       Migration    Migration Prerequisites  Ensure these requirements are met before you start the Info Pak migration process     The uPerform server is up and running   At least one uPerform project is available   The uPerform server is accessible from your computer     Info Pak Admin products  Web Architect  Glossary  are installed on this computer and the data is  set up properly for migration     Content and Parent locations are accessible from the uPerform server   A uPerform account is available      uPerform client template is available for the transformation process     Interface Lanquage  About    Close       4  Review the prerequisites and  optionally  specify the interface language        ANCILE Solutions  Inc 
271. rform server workspace    Click on the project name    Click Document Library    Select the folder containing the content    Click on the name of the binder containing the content you want to view     Under Translations click on the name of the content     Q The current version designator is displayed to the right of Version in the Document  Properties portion of the screen  A list of previous versions is displayed in the Version  History portion of the screen     Version History    ales Order  1 0  Jane Doe    To access an earlier version of a document  click on the content hyperlink below Version  History     Rolling Back to the Previous Version    1     2     3     Click sissi in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name     Click Document Library        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  101    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       4     5     Select the folder containing the content   Click on the name of the binder containing the content you want to view     In the Translations section  click on the name of the content     Q A list of previous versions is displayed in the Version History portion of the screen     Click Rollback on the left menu to set the current version of the document to the previous  version     A When you confirm the rollback  the current version of the document will be  permanently deleted from the server  You cannot roll back a transformed Info Pak  document  i e  the resulting uPerform document   For more information on working  
272. rlink     5  Select Add Filter on the left menu  Create a New Filter  Directory Server Base DN     Filter String     fd OK   E cance     6  Complete the following fields     Feld  Description    Directory Server Base DN Enter the Directory Server Base DN     Example  OU uPerform  DC acme  DC com    This option is not available if your  user information source is created  from a file     Filter String For a directory server  enter an LDAP query   Example     amp  objectClass user  memberOf CN HumanR  esourses OU Groups  OU uPerform DC acme   DC com     For a file user source  enter the XPath query to  the user  Example   users user   group  HR        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  45          Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       7T  Click OK     8  To activate the filter  apply it to a group  For more information  refer to Assigning Content to  a Group  on page 61      A If a filter is not assigned to a group  users in the filter will not be added into uPerform  unless they are a member of another filter     Editing a User Information Source Filter    Q A user source filter cannot be edited if it is synchronizing     1  Click Administration on the left menu    2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area    3  Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Select the  User Source  hyperlink    5  Select the  Filter Name  hyperlink    6  Select Edit Properties     7T  Complete the following fields     Field     Description  Edit t
273. rm  open the profile connection you created as described in Specifying a Connection  with the uPerform Server     Q This profile contains all of the information necessary to manage a connection with  Oracle E Business     a Oracle 12 Conn    Application  Oracle 12  Applications Help Web Agent Profile Setting  http   dev rwduperform  com gm 1 11 38201  Applications Help Web Agent Profile Setting for Authors  http   dev ruduperform  com RWDHIp authorMode  html    Base Help URL  http   g4korapp dev4000  rwdtech com 8001 OA_HTML     Browser Settings    Width  40  Height  80  Location  Right    Stay On Top  IE Only   No       304    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       4  Copy the URL from the Applications Help Web Agent Profile Settings for End Users  field        System Profile Values       Application Responsibility User  Profile Option Name Site 2  l Applications Help Web Agent             5  In Oracle E Business  paste the end user setting URL into the Applications Web Help Agent  profile setting column of the system profile value you selected earlier in this section     6  Save the end user settings        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  305    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring SAP Portal for Use with Context Sensitive Help    SAP EP is a web based platform for delivering information from various sources to end users   Using the URL to Help Topic setting  the SAP EP can display the correct content for each  iView Portal Page in a br
274. rm Summary by Project  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click View Term Summary by Project on the left menu        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  189    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       3  Choose one of the following options     Field  Description           Rebuild Click to rebuild the term summary database     View Existing Click to view the existing term summary database     4  Click Save at the prompt to access the Microsoft Excel XML spreadsheet        Q In Microsoft Excel 2002  the file is opened as an XML file in the web browser  select  the save option in the browser to download the file to your local computer  In  Microsoft Excel 2003  the file is automatically opened in Excel  Support for displaying  the XML spreadsheet is not available in Microsoft Excel 2000     5  Open the Microsoft Excel file  and review the following information for each project sheet  displayed     Field   Description  Context Context in which the term is used     Default Language Language specified in the glossary configuration  and the definition for the term in this language     Other Languages Additional definitions in other languages           190 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Importing and Exporting a Glossary and Translations    Import functionality allows you to upload glossary terms and definitions from an external source   as well as import a glossary from ANCILE uPerform  You must ensure the imported file is
275. rofiles as necessary  You must specify a  connection for each instance of the application for which you want to provide context   sensitive help     Field   Description   Enter the name of the connection profile    Enter details describing the profile    Application Select the application from the drop down list     Base Help URL Enter the URL of the help application for which you  want to provide context sensitive help   For example  http    servername   path  This option is not available for Help Launchpad or  Web Profiles           298 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Field  Description                   8             Search Method This option is available only for the Web  application  Select Transaction Code to search by  the uPerform transaction code property only  Full  Text  All Words  to allow an AND search based on  properties  or Full Text  Any Words  to allow an  OR search based on properties     Width Set the width of the browser window in which the  help will display    Height Set the height of the browser window in which the  help will display    Location Specify the location of the browser window in  which the help will display     Stay on Top Select this option to allow the browser window  containing help to display on top of all open  applications    Q9  This option is available for use only with  Internet Explorer     7  Click Save        Viewing and Editing a Connection to the uPerform Server  1  InuPerform  select Adminis
276. roject s  in the Assign  Template Name  udt    window  Optionally  to assign a template to all projects in the list  click  select or unselect  all      Assign Orchestrate udt        select or unselect all                                         Click Save to assign the template to the project s      Versioning a Template    q1     2     In the client  open the template you want to update     Select FILE  gt  CHECK IN  gt  CHECK IN  TEMPLATE NAME         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  69    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       3  Optionally  select the Lock Template for Editing checkbox     4  Click OK     Rolling Back to a Previous Template Version    Rolling back to a previous template version sets the version of the template used to  publish content  Rolling back to a previous version permanently deletes the current  version of the template from the server     1  Click Administration on the left menu    2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area    3  Click uPerform Templates in the Server Administration area   4  Select a template from the list     5  Click Rollback     Rollback       6  Click OK     7  Optionally  republish the documents associated with the template  For more information  refer  to Republishing Documents  on page 132      Viewing Template Properties  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area   3  Click uPerform Templates in the Server Administration area     4  Perform one of
277. rom the following list     Field   Description  Contains Any Contains any keyword     Contains All Contains all of the keywords   Does not contain Does not contain any of the keywords     14  Choose from the following options     If You Want To    Specify the field name as a variable Select the Variable radio button   object when generating reports          Specify the field name as a fixed object   Select the Fixed radio button   when generating reports    15  Click Add     16  Repeat Steps 12 through 15 to add additional filters to the report        208 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 10  Using Reports       17  Optionally  click Delete next to a filter to remove it from the report     18  Click Save     g Refer to Viewing Reports  on page 199  and Exporting Reports  on page 200  for  information on viewing the report output     Deleting a Custom Report    Q  By default  you cannot delete standard reports from the uPerform server     1  Click Reports in the left menu   2  Click on the name of the custom report   3  Click Delete Report in the left menu     4  Atthe prompt  click OK     A Reports are permanently deleted from the server  You cannot recover a deleted report        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  209    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates    Author templates in ANCILE uPerform control the formatting and  publishing options available to authors  Templates allow you to set  standards and maintain consistency within your authoring team        211    Chapter 11  Using Autho
278. rom the following options     if You Want To    Subscribe to events for all filters Go to Step 6   associated with a user information    source    Subscribe to events for a single filter Click on the  Filter Name  hyperlink   Go to Step 6     6  Click Subscribe on the left pane        7  Choose from the following options     Field  Description                   Synchronization Succeeded   Check Synchronization Succeeded to be notified of  synchronizations that are successful        Synchronization Failed Check Synchronization Failed to be notified of  synchronizations that fail        48 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups    Field  Description                  Post notifications to my Check Post notifications to my Personal Page to  Personal Page be notified of your selected events on your personal       page   Send notifications in an email   Check Send notifications in an email report to    report to current user  current user  be notified of your selected events  via email        8  If Send notifications in an email report to  current user  is selected  select one of the  following options     If You Want To Then   Receive event notifications in a daily Select Add notifications to my daily email  email report report    Receive event notifications in a weekly   Select Add notifications to my weekly email  email report report    Receive event notifications Select Send me an email immediately after  immediately after event each event     9 
279. ronizing from the user source page will synchronize all filters  associated to that user source  Synchronizing from the filter page will only synchronize  that filter  Synchronizing from the Groups page will synchronize all user sources and  filters  Before synchronizing  the filter needs to be assigned to a group  For more  information  refer to Creating a Group     Click Administration on the left menu   Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area     Click on the  User Source  hyperlink        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  47    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       5  Choose from the following options     if You Want To  Synchronize all filters associated with   Go to Step 6   the user information source       Synchronize a single filter to Click on the  Filter Name  hyperlink  and go to  add update a specific group Step 6     6  Select Synchronize on the left menu     7  Click OK     Optionally  schedule automatic synchronization using ANCILE uSchedule  For more information   refer to  Schedule Automated Tasks  in the ANCILE uPerform Administration manual     Subscribing to Synchronization Summary Notifications  1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   3  Click User Information Sources in the Users  Roles  and Groups area   4  Click the  User Source  hyperlink containing the user source you want to view     5  Choose f
280. rowser window in which the  help will display    Height Set the height of the browser window in which the  help will display    Location Specify the location of the browser window in  which the help will display     Stay on Top    10  Click Save        Select this option to allow the browser window  containing help to display on top of all open  applications     g This option is available for use only with  Internet Explorer        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     301    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring Oracle E Business for Use with Context Sensitive Help    Context sensitive help allows you to provide end users with quick and convenient access to help  via an online performance support system  End users request help from the uPerform server via a  direct link in the Oracle E Business application     Specifying an Author Account for Oracle E Business    Q The Oracle system administrator must create a designated author account in Oracle E   Business  This account communicates with the uPerform server to generate the screen  data necessary to request help from Oracle E Business     You must log into Oracle E Business using a designated author account in order to  record help ready documents  Context sensitive help is not available when logged in  via the author account     For more information on creating user accounts  refer to the Oracle E Business  documentation     1  InuPerform  select Administration in the left navigation pane    2  Select Server Administ
281. rtal page in a portal system can be contained in a tray  The tray includes the  name of the iView portal page and a drop down menu of options such as Refresh  Open in New  Window  Personalize  Details  and Help     To enable the iView portal page required options     1  Log into SAP Enterprise Portal with Content Administrator permission        306    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       2  Inthe Portal Catalog  right click on the desired iView portal page and select Open  gt  Object     Q An iView or portal page may display in several different contexts based on your role  within the SAP EP  For example  the  Create User  iView may be configured  differently for Super Administrators than it is for Content Administrators  In addition   note the specific role s  in which an iView portal page is to be modified  If more than  one role applies  the iView portal page must be edited for all roles     3  Inthe editing area  select the Property Editor panel located to the right of the editing area   4  Inthe Property Category list  select Show All    5  For the Show  Details  option property  click Yes    6  For the Show  Help  option property  click Yes    7  For the Show Tray option property  click Yes     8  Click Save     Locating the iView Portal Page ID    Each iView and portal page in SAP EP has a unique alphanumeric identifier  which is registered  in the portal content directory  PCD   The identifier is assigned when a new iView portal page is  
282. rver Page  ASP  or Java Server  Page  JSP  on a web server to receive the output for  subsequent storage and reporting in a learning  management system  Any technology that accepts  the form Post method using HTTP can be used to  handle the output     Example  http   www yourcompany com results asp    Note that if the student s web browser security  settings are set to High  warning messages will be  displayed   Q The Create Package option must be  disabled in order to enter a URI        6  Complete review the following fields     Field  Description                  Include in results Select the desired checkboxes to indicate the  information to be captured when the simulation self    test or assessment is completed   Specify the required passing score     7  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template        Default Publication Settings  Simulation  Caption Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Simulation under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  243    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Simulation Caption Settings               OO  Senclation Publcation Setings       Simulation Caption Settings    5  Highlight a phrase in the phrase list   6  Click Select Phrase     7  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add   Select a language from the left   Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Select a p
283. ry on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Enter the existing term associated to which you want to add a new synonym in the Find Term  field     3  Click Search     4  Click Change Synonyms on the left menu   8 Synonyms for Order    Enter Synonym   Sales Order         ES    Synonyms     5  Enter the new synonym in the Enter Synonym field     6  Click Add   Q To enter multiple synonyms  repeat Step 5 and Step 6     7  Click Save     Removing a Synonym  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Enter the term associated with the synonym in the Find Term field     3  Click Search        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  181    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       4  Click Change Synonyms on the left menu     B Synonyms for Order    Enter Synonym        Synonyms     Sales Order    5  Inthe Synonyms list  select the synonym s  to be removed     6  Click Remove Selected     7  Click Save        182    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Using Globalize    Definitions for terms in uPerform content can be updated using a process called globalization   During globalization  definitions are inserted into documents and new terms in documents are  gathered for inclusion in the central glossary on the server  The globalization process affects only  text within recorded Field Description tables  Text within Field Description tables manually  inserted during editing is ignored     If a term exists in the document  but not in the
284. s  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help          Configuring SAP SRM 4 6 for Use with Context Sensitive Help    SAP SRM captures context IDs and allows the SRM system to display the correct help content for  each screen in a separate browser window  The context sensitive help solution for SAP SRM  provides custom help for only SRM Enterprise Buyers Professional  EBP  screens via the Help  link in each screen     One of the things that can be contained within an SAP EP iView is the SAP SRM user interface   In other words  a user can perform an SAP SRM transaction from within an iView  If a customer  wants context sensitive help for an SAP EP iView  regardless of what the iView contains   then   the context sensitive help solution for SAP EP is required     Obtaining the Help Launchpad Code Supplement    Download the Help Launchpad Code Supplement for SAP SRM from the ANCILE Product  Support Center  https   ancile parature com   This code supplement was authored by ANCILE for  use by uPerform customers only  The code supplement file contains JavaScript code that redirects  the SAP SRM   s existing Help link to a help page created with uPerform     Modifying the Workplace Integration API    SAP Internet Transaction Server  ITS  embeds the wpintegration js client side script into every  SRM screen at runtime  This script provides programmatic access to several SRM screen  functions  including the Help link  By modifying the wpintegration js script via the ABAP  Workbench  w
285. s applied to this type of folder  you will not be notified when  documents are added  updated  or removed from the folder  End users are unable to  subscribe to dynamic website folders     For more information on dynamic website folders  refer to Building the Website via  Dynamic Website Folders  on page 119      Editing and Stopping a Subscription  1  Click G ems  to go to your personal page   2  Click My Account on the left menu   3  Click My Subscriptions on the left menu to display a list of your subscriptions     4  Select one of the following options     If You Want To    Unsubscribe to a listed item Click Unsubscribe below the item name   Click OK in the following confirmation window        Edit your subscription to a Click Edit Subscription below the item name   listed item Change your notification option s   and click OK        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  27    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and  Groups    ANCILE uPerform manages access to content on the server via user  accounts and role assignments  User accounts can be created for end  users  authors  and administrators  Users are assigned to one of three  main roles  which provide access to particular projects  Groups are  optional and can be used to filter specific end user access to content on  the website     User  role  and group management tasks are performed by a system  administrator        29    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups          Introduction to Managing Users  Roles  and Groups    Three 
286. s intended for use as online help or  performance support     Editor    The application used to create and modify uPerform content     End User    Any person who accesses performance support content through a website     Flash    A file format developed by Adobe  this output type is used to display content within uPerform  courses and simulations     Glossary  The uPerform function that enables the management of terms and definitions  Also  the name of  an ANCILE Info Pak application        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  363    Glossary of Terms       Guided Help  Published HTML content designed to be used during task execution     Info Pak  An ANCILE product  includes Publisher  Web Architect  Glossary  and Help Launchpad  components     Migration  The process of moving your Info Pak project s  to uPerform     Migration Wizard  A tool that allows you to migrate your Info Pak project s  to uPerform  or transform your Info Pak  documents to uPerform documents     Parent Document  A legacy document created by ANCILE Info Pak that can contain a screenflow  a BPP  procedural  information  configuration information  and testing information for a process or transaction  The  published child output of a parent document can be linked to display on the uPerform website     Publication  Output published from uPerform content  a publication is meant to be consumed by an end user     Publish  A process that exports content to a variety of types and formats  including cue card and Flash  simulati
287. s must be  entered in the Info Pak   Glossary as well     Creates links from your uPerform website  When navigating the uPerform website   the end user will view a uPerform generated website that points to existing Info Pak  and uPerform content that is glued together via links generated during the migration  process  This form of linking to both Info Pak content and uPerform content is  referred to as operating in  dual mode      Transforms your Info Pak documents and simulations to uPerform documents  You  can then edit these uPerform documents and check them into the server and provide  them to your users via the uPerform website        330    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Using Dual Mode Functionality vs  Transformation Functionality    If you will be creating new content with uPerform  but your end users still need to access Info Pak  content  the dual mode functionality allows you to leverage your existing Info Pak content on the  uPerform website     As system changes occur in the application s  you are documenting  you may elect to transform  your Info Pak documents into uPerform documents  After transformation  you can edit the content  as necessary  Your new uPerform documents are then checked into the uPerform server and linked  to the website     The following is a summary of some best practices you may want to consider as you plan your use  of the transformation functionality     CJ If you have a relatively small Info 
288. s to discussion messages contributed by  end users     For more information on website discussions  refer  to Using Subscriptions Within a Discussion  on page  160     LMS Transactions A history of alert messages received from a  Learning Management System  LMS   LMS  Transactions will display only if transactions exist  on the LMS   For more information on publishing courses to an  LMS  refer to Publishing Courses to an LMS  on  page 135         8  Toreturn to the binder  click Return to Binder on the left menu        82 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Managing the Document Library    After you have established your document library structure  you can manage the structure and  contents by updating folder properties  deleting folders  adding managed documents and web  documents  changing document owners  and deleting documents     Managing Folders    Folders allow you to organize multiple documents within a project     Updating Folder Properties    1     2     Click   959  in the uPerform server workspace   Click on the project name    Click Document Library    Select the desired folder     Click Edit Properties on the left menu   Edit General Properties    Name   intranet    Edit the following information     Field        Description                 1                   Description Edit the folder description        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  83    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Field  Description                
289. script pdf ps pdf html htm      qi step   Quick Reference  Step  postscript pdf ps pdf html htm     ex  Exercise postscriptipdf ps pdf html htrn source doc    bp asap BPP postscript  pdf ps pdf html htm source doc    cd  Document de configuration  postscript pdf ps  pdf  html  h    td  Test Document postscript pdf ps pdf html htm source c    ce    a     Cue Card html htm    bec  BPP cue Card html htm    Info Pak Asia  Info pak Asia_doc postscript pdf ps pdf html htm sourc    info pak simulation_ssfljava simulationthtm  dhtml simulation htm flash simulation htrn    ContentLocation   http    rwd 606485  corp  rwdtech  com Joel Content    WebSafePaths  false       ANCILE Solutions  Inc  353    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       In the event you do modify publishing options and or content location  you must modify the  following properties     CJ The relevant child document type to add formats to the list    O Content Location  You do not need to re migrate data again if the content location is  changed  Simply change the value of this field and run content verification        O Web Safe Paths  Change the value in this field if all documents are republished with a  different websafe path setting in the Info Pak   Configuration tool and run content  verification     You cannot add new custom child document types or new assimilated document types from this  interface  If you have new document types  you must execute a new migration        354 ANCILE Solutions  Inc    
290. ses eot eet ie oot ie tintas lds tates de oeste de ees sawed occa vv e oue 3  Conventions Used In This Manual    5 42026 coin Nadie li xau debis 4  Available Technical SUpport ooo a oes uei ore bt pe ei coh used eos eii Ue td 5  Chapter 2  Getting Started                                       ecce cec eeeees esee een eie nnn 7  Introduction to Managing Content saec enler de Leer oes re Messe Lese tt Secale Re cord tU edd 8  ACCESSING the Server WOLKSDACO uso Eoi ertt aetati D ANI Ede du tuS sami I ce End 10  Managing Your veo LR               13  Getting Help on the uPerform Server Workspace                   essesseseeeeeeenen nene eene 15  ERINE IL 16  Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace                                          17  Introduction to the uPerform Server Workspace                      essen enne 18  Using the Server WOrk Space sia  sen oe ende a e e lesdadeasuasen YR PLAT rna Pe URN nasce dn i 19  Using th   TODOBSDBEE sues ee reset cat eite sees in cork seg E ed 19  sing tlie Lett Menu  uota Deeper total etie acne ibus EE A a E 21  Using the Navigation Buttons      ae er ee ee sedet oa Gh eke 21  Using the Lett Menu Opti Ons  essere aa aaea a  22  Expanding and Collapsing the Left Menu                   sseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeen rennen 24  Using X our Personal Page  uoi eiae etie totos pato esci Casan testet 24  Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups                                    29  Introduction to Managing Users  Roles  and Groups             
291. start fresh     Saved Migrations   E    Migration Name           340 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       8  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Execute a migration for the first time Select   new  from the Saved Migrations drop   down list  and enter a name in the Migration  Name field     Run a previous migration run on a Select a project from the Saved Migrations  blank project drop down list     Optionally  edit the name in the Migration  Name field     Import a migration file from a pre 3 1   Select Import      and specify the file     version Optionally  edit the name in the Migration    Name field        9  Click Next        Migration Wizard   Migration    y Migration    Step 3  Connect to uPerform Server  Specify a connection with the uPerform server     uPerform server location   hitps      uPerform   Username    Password     SSL Configuration       C Trust invalid SSL certificates    C Use Proxy Authentication    Username    Password           Test Connection       10  Complete the following information     Field   Description  uPerform server location Enter the URL of your uPerform server   Username Enter the username for the uPerform server     Enter the password for the uPerform server   Trust invalid SSL certificates   Select this option if you are using SSL but your  certificate is not signed     Use Proxy Authentication Click the Use Proxy Authentication checkbox if your   optional  administrator has
292. system  the selected filtering conditions and the number of users currently  logged into the system  Please use caution when running reports during peak usage hours and please allow the system an  appropriate amount of time to generate the report before closing the browser     Required Parameters    Field Name Condition Value             Project Is Acme ERP       J o   E cancel    5  Review the following information   Field  Description                  Field Name Displays the built in parameters for report  generation    Condition Displays the search parameters specified for the  report generation     Displays the name of the project for which you want  to generate a report     Select a project from the drop down list        6  Click OK     View Document Tracking Report    Project Name Document Type File Name Owner Workflow Status Version Name Version Number Modified Date   Acme ERP Presentation Materials Web Document 3 24 08 3 16 PM   Acme ERP Glossary uPerform Document Glossary udc John Doe 2  3 26 08 1 11 PM  uPerform Document HR  Timesheets fr udc John Doe 1 1 3 24 08 3 39 PM  Managed Document CAB_22708_Disaster Recovery Failover Planning ppt John Doe 1 0 3 24 08 3 15 PM  uPerform Document HR  Timesheets udc John Doe 1 1 3 24 08 2 20 PM  uPerform Document PS Timesheets udc John Doe 1d 3 24 08 3 43 PM       Results shown  1 6 of 6    4  gt     7  Review the list of documents available in the report     8  Optionally  click Previous or Next to scroll to the next page      
293. t Course Header   Configuration Information Freetext     Course Footer Header footer Exercise Data Sheet   Course Header Header footer Field   Exercise Data Sheet Freetext Footer   Field Free Text   Footer Header footer Hosier   Free Text Freetext d   Header Header footer ma   Heading Freetext I   It Step Note   Note Note  P  r  se    Purpose Freetext   Result Freetext Result   Screen Flow Freetext Screenkiow       Start the task using the menu path  Step Start the task using the menu pa      Step Step Step   Substep Step Substep   Test Information Freetext       Test Information    Freeted Test Scenarios    Test Scenarios          General Properties Phrases Publications Styles   Blocks   Sections Ready    3  Perform one of the following options     i You Want To    Select the block from the content area  and click  Duplicate     Delete a block Select the block from the content area  and click  Delete     At the prompt  click Yes        4  Optionally  select a step type from the Default Recorder Step drop down list     5  Select one of the following blocks from the task pane     Field  Description        0 0       The block that contains the task information        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  273    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Field  Description        0      A The block that contains the business process  description overview  input  output  comments  and  tips and tricks     Configuration Information The block that contains the configuration  information for the doc
294. t Goto Selection Criteria Utilities M  System Help     7  ajadi eeebmmi anos Ha os                                                    Display View  Administration  Display of the SAP Library     2 E   Variant Platform Area ServerNa_  Path Langua  Default  fal     RwoHelp ms XML DOCU   RWD 60791  gm  format doSAP DE V a                                                                                                                                                                                  6  Complete the following fields     Field     Description         Variant Enter a variant name    Platform Enter a platform    Area Enter an area    PU fEememMot 00   Server Name In uPerform  copy the URL from the SR13  PlainHtmlHttp Server Name field as described in    Viewing and Editing a Connection to the uPerform  Server  on page 299   This value is generated by  uPerform and is not configurable     Paste the URL into the Server Name field     Path In uPerform  copy the URL from the SR13  PlainHtmlHttp Server Path field as described in  Viewing and Editing a Connection to the uPerform  Server  on page 299   This value is generated by  uPerform and is not configurable   Paste the URL into the Path field           316 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help  Field  Description          Language Enter the language key   Example  For German  enter DE           Default Select this checkbox if the language specified is the  default help language     7  Click        8
295. t alignment of each  respective button individually           290 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 12  Using Custom Skins and Modifying CSS Files       FYouWantTo  GoTo  Wodi    Override or replace images  displayed in the course menu    Modify the username prompt  in courses and simulations    The menu section of the CSS    The user name prompt page  section of the CSS file        div courseImage to set the image URL  for the course icon     div menuHerelImage to set the image  URL for the menu here icon     div menuVisitedImage to set the  image URL for the menu visited icon     div menuMinusImage to set the image  URL for the menu minus icon     div menuPlusImage to set the image  URL for the menu plus icon     div menuAssessmentImage to set the  image URL for the menu assessment  icon     div assessmentPassedImage to set the  image URL for the assessment passed  icon     div postAssessmentPassedImage to  set the image URL for the post  assessment passed icon   div postAssessmentImage to set the    image URL for the post assessment  icon     div menuBranchImage to set the  image URL for the menu branch icon     div menuBranchChoiceImage to set  the image URL for the menu branch  choice icon     div branchConnectorImage to set the  image URL for the branch connector  icon     div singleBranchImage to set the  image URL for the single branch icon     div extendBranchImage to set the  image URL for the extend branch icon     body uiPromptPageBackground to set  the background
296. t is being used to create the documents that this dynamic website folder will contain  If more than one template is  being used please select a template which defines all the properties needed by the filtering conditions     Templates    ERP Template udt v             Search all templates          14  Select the template containing the properties from which you want to create your dynamic  website folder     15  Optionally  select Search all templates to expand the dynamic website folder to other  templates with matching properties     16  Click Next     Create a New Dynamic Website Folder    Select the filter conditions for this dynamic website folder  Filters allow you to specify what documents vill  display in this dynamic website folder     Add Filter Condition    Property Condition Value    dd  Transaction Code s      Contains Any M    Current Filter    Property Condition Value    17  Select a template property from the Property drop down list        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  121    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       18  Select a condition from the Condition drop down list     Field Description              Contains Any       Contains the exact values to be specified in Step  19     For example     Transaction Code   ME2S will return all  documents with the Transaction Code property  set to ME25     Contains any of the values to be specified in Step  19  which allows you to provide a comma  delimited list of values within the Value field   For example     Transaction
297. t menu     Click uPerform Users to locate and specify the  current owner     Click uPerform Users to locate and specify the  new owner     Click Next     1  Click iss  in the uPerform server workspace     2  Click on the project name     3  Click Document Library     4  Navigate to the folder containing the document to be deleted     5  Navigate to the uPerform binder or document cover page        ANCILE Solutions  Inc     89    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       6  Click Delete on the left menu     A Deleting a document will move the document and its associated content  such as  previous versions and discussions  to the recycle bin  For detailed information on  managing the recycle bin  refer to Managing the Recycle Bin  on page 108      7  Click OK at the confirmation prompt     Editing the Hit Count and Assessment Results    To help determine how often a document is being used during a specific period of time you can  reset the hit count  Hit count is determined per browser session when logged in as an end user or  when accessing the server as an anonymous user  Hit count does not provide any information on  the user who accessed the document    Resetting the hit count must be performed on a per document basis  Hit counts are available for  uPerform and managed documents  If you want to run a hit count report for all documents  refer to  Create and Edit Custom Reports  on page 205      Assessment results are available for Info Pak simulations and uPerform s
298. talling the Migration Wizard    Installing the Migration Wizard  The Migration Wizard can be installed during installation of the uPerform client software   A You must have an administrator installation of Info Pak 5 51 or higher on your    computer in order to install the Migration Wizard     For detailed information on installing the client  refer to  Getting Started  Creating Content  in the  companion manual Creating Content with ANCILE uPerform     Uninstalling the Migration Wizard    To uninstall only the Migration Wizard  perform the following steps    1  Select START  gt  SETTINGS  gt  CONTROL PANEL  gt  ADD OR REMOVE PROGRAMS   2  Select ANCILE uPerform Client from the Currently installed programs list   3  Click Change    4  Select the Modify radio button    5  Click Next    6  Deselect the Include the Migration Wizard and Migration Wizard checkboxes   7  Proceed through the remaining uninstall wizard screens     8  Close the Add or Remove Programs window     For detailed information on uninstalling the client  refer to  Getting Started  Creating Content  in  the companion manual Creating Content with ANCILE uPerform        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  333    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content          Preparing to Execute the Migration    Migration Prerequisites and Recommendations    Ensure the following required prerequisites are met prior to beginning the migration     M       02    a    YOU OU    OU       The Migration Wizard is installed and ANCILE Info Pak 
299. ted in the simulation view  Once you have  specified the hotspot  you can delete the image     Menus  During transformation  Info Pak images are located and the menu path is  specified in the associated step  If you are working with content that contains a  document and a simulation  the menu image should be edited in the simulation view     Customized Step Text for Field Description and If Then Go To Tables  Any  customized step text inserted into tables will be inserted into the uPerform documents  as a step above the table  uPerform tables cannot contain custom step text and the  table must be modified within the document  or changed globally within the template     Action Notes  Info Pak action notes that have been modified will be added as regular  notes in the uPerform document  The new note will match the step text     Notes  An Info Pak note inserted between a screenshot and a step will be inserted  below the first step after the screen shot in the uPerform document     Field Description Tables  Info Pak images and notes in field description tables will  transform only from the description column  Notes and images are not allowed in the  field column within uPerform  You must identify the proper place for these images or  notes from the field column and manually insert these into the uPerform document        360    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       O Customized action note text  During transformation  step text and action note 
300. tep     6  Under Default Mask Settings  choose from the following options     Field  Description        Background Color Click Select to specify a default background color           Border Color Click Select to specify a default border color   Select a size from the drop down list     7T  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        Specifying General Settings  Images  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        218 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Images in the task pane                       4  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add an image to the template Click Add   Navigate to the image and click Open    Update an image Select the image to update  and click Update   Navigate to the updated image  and click Open     Delete a custom image Select the custom image from the list  and click  Delete     At the prompt  click Yes     You cannot delete the standard images delivered  with uPerform        Q A preview of the selected image will display to the right     5  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Specifying General Settings  Data Files  1  From the editor  open the new template     2  Click General on the status bar        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  219    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       3  Click Data Files in the task pane                 4  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a data file to the template Click Add   
301. ter the definition in the text field     Q If you have enabled the use of rich text in definitions  you can set the font  font size   and other character attributes for your definition text  You can also use color in your  definition text and background and embed a hyperlink within the definition  For more  information  refer to Formatting a Definition  on page 177      Click Save     Add a context to the term as described in Assigning a Context to a Definition  on page 174         ANCILE Solutions  Inc  173    Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Adding a Definition to an Existing Term  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Enter the term to which the definition should be added in the Find Term field   3  Click Search   4  Click Add Definition on the left menu   5  Select the language for the definition from the Definition Language drop down list     6  Enter the definition in the text field     Q If you have enabled the use of rich text in definitions  you can set the font  font size   and other character attributes for your definition text  You can also use color in your  definition text and background and embed a hyperlink within the definition  For more  information  refer to Formatting a Definition  on page 177      7  Click Save     8  Adda context to the term as described in Assigning a Context to a Definition  on page 174      Assigning a Context to a Definition  1  Click Glossary on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Enter the
302. ter the text in the Content area   Click OK     Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the Phrase listbox   Optionally  enter text into the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        8  Click Select Phrase   9  Choose a phrase from the list   10  Click OK     11  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course Package  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Course Package under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     Studert Gude Pubicaion Settings  aScorm Sten Value  leted ncomplet    4  Select SCORM 2004 or SCORM 1 2 from the drop down list to select the output   5  If you are using SCORM 1 2  select a completion type value from the drop down list     6  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  247    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       Default Publication Settings  Guided Help  General Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Selected Guided Help under Default Publication Settings in the task pane   Guided Help Settings  Guided Help General Settings ov  General  Playback Timer   20   seconds    v  Allow User to Store Preferences    Home Page  J  Title  J  Author  4  Description    Copyright    Publish date    4  Select Guided Help General Settings from the drop down list     5  Complete the following fields   Fie
303. text is  compared to determine if the text is the same for both  if it is not  a note containing  the action note text is inserted into the step  pointing to the hotspot  During quality  review  the author can choose which note to keep or edit the notes accordingly     Values in simulations  If the value is set to the lesson default  it is transformed to use  the uPerform default stored in the template  Affected values include  case sensitivity   auto playback timing  help text  and playback color    Editing Transformed Info Pak Documents    For more information  refer to refer to  Editing and Formatting Basics  and  Editing and  Formatting  Procedural Content  in the companion manual Creating Content with ANCILE  uPerform        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  361    Glossary of Terms    Author    A user who creates or edits content     Context  Functionality that allows you to manually create a website structure by assigning website folders  to content within the document library     Course  A collection of informational content and optional assessment tools such as multiple choice  drag   and drop  and fill in the blank     Course Package  A container for multiple uPerform content files output to a single master SCORM package     Definition  Within the glossary functionality  amplifying information about a term used in the target  application  A term can have multiple definitions based on the context of the document     Document  A set of instructions  images  and associated object
304. text to a folder or document within the document library  you are  creating a link from the website to the folder or document  You are not copying or moving content  into the website  The link informs the uPerform server of the proper published content to display  on the website     O Assigning a context to a document library folder  Allows you to assign a context at  the folder level  All published content within that folder will be linked to the specified  website folder s   as well as the related content  When you assign a context at the  document level  only that document and its related content  when published  will be  linked to the specified website folder s      O Assign content to a website folder  Allows you to add documents and document  library folders into a single website folder  Documents must be within the same  project     Both document library folders and content can be linked to more than one location within the  website  Website context assignment is available to administrators and to authors who have been  granted access by an administrator        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  115    Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Assigning a Context to Content or a Document Library Folder  1  Click  Gsissis  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Document Library   4  Navigate to the folder or document that you want to link to the website     5  Click Assign Website Context on the left menu to display the first level of website fol
305. the Glossary          Introduction to the Glossary    Glossary functionality is provided with uPerform to allow you to maintain a database of terms and  definitions for procedural content that is checked into the uPerform server  The glossary allows  you to insert customized  business specific definitions into your documents     There is one glossary database for the entire uPerform instance  However  the definition for a term  may vary between the projects within the uPerform instance     Maintaining terms and definitions in one repository allows for documents to be updated quickly  and accurately  New terms can be added  and changes can be made to definitions for existing  terms within the glossary     Once you have standardized the valid terms and definitions  the globalization process is used to  update definitions  descriptions  of terms  fields  within the documents prior to making them  available to your users     You can create and manage multiple definitions for a single term based on the folder location of  the document  Glossary will then insert the appropriate definition into your document based on  this location and the document language     A Only one language can be assigned to a definition     Your administrator can enable or disable the use of a centralized glossary  If the centralized  glossary is disabled  authors can enter definitions directly into a document        166    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary          Specifying T
306. the drop down list     Guided Help Settings              Skins        Default    Preview                       5  Select a skin from the Skins drop down list     Q A preview of the skin selection will display in the Preview window     6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description             O o O o O  Player Colors   Select primary and secondary colors from the drop down list        Select primary and secondary  and link text colors from the drop down list     Q Optionally  specify custom colors by clicking Select to the right of list        250 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       7  Select from the following options     Field     Description         Step Window Under Step Window  select a height and width   maximum image height and width  and screen position  and whether to maximize on startup     General Enables a smooth  animated transmission from step to  step     Also allows the help to always display on top of all  other windows when running in Internet Explorer        8  Select FILE    SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Guided Help  Guided Help Captions  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar   3  Selected Guided Help under Default Publication Settings in the task pane     4  Select Guided Help Captions     Guided Help Settings                            Guided Help Captions    Captions  Current Step Mode Caption  Full View Caption  Guided Help Caption  Loadi
307. the dynamic website    folder     21  Click Save        124    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Deleting a Dynamic Website Folder  1  Click   amp issis  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name   3  Click Website   4  Select the Dynamic Website Folder   5  Click Delete Folder     6  Click OK     Q Deleting the dynamic website folder will move the folder and subfolders to the recycle  bin        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  125    Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Browsing the Website    Via standard hyperlink navigation  you can browse the website and view the hierarchy and  published content objects     Navigating via the Website Context    Content objects include a Website Context area on the cover page  This area provides a  hierarchical display of the object s location in the website  You can click on a hyperlink in the  displayed hierarchy to navigate to another location in the website     Website Contexts    Collaboration Group Memory  gt  Acme Development Project  gt  Website  gt  Acme Sales       126 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website          Publishing Content for Display on the Website    In addition to local publishing  uPerform provides a mechanism to publish uPerform content   managed documents  and web documents directly from the server  The publish queue on the  server can be configured to automatically publish at off peak hours  In addition  uPerform content  will publis
308. ties tab     4  Enable the Transaction Code property   g The recorder may automatically capture the contextID  however  ANCILE    recommends enabling the Transaction Code property in case it is not automatically  captured     5  Save the template        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  295    Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Recording a Document and Making It Available for Context Sensitive Help     E    2     Log into the supported application using a designated account     Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Record and edit the document    Insert steps into a previously recorded  uPerform document       Using the template you created in Creating a  Template  record and edit the document using the  uPerform client and the procedures described in  the Creating Content with ANCILE uPerform  user manual     Update the template associated with the  uPerform document     Open the uPerform document associated with the  template     Select the Simulation tab     Select INSERT    STEPS    FROM NEW  RECORDING    Record the steps using the uPerform client and  the procedures described in the Creating Content  with ANCILE uPerform user manual    Edit the uPerform document     For more information on recording  editing  and  using the recorder toolbar  refer to the  companion manual Creating Content with  ANCILE uPerform     Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Provide context sensitive help using  Oracle E Business        Specify an author acc
309. tion area     3  Click Users in the Users  Roles  and Groups area        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  33    Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Enter any part of the user s name into the search field  or click All Users to search all users in  the uPerform server     Q If you imported users via a user information source  you can search for any attribute  that has been mapped into uPerform  For more information  refer to Adding a User  Information Source from a Directory Server  on page 38      Click Find     Updating a User Account    9    Users synchronized via a file source can change passwords  Users synchronized via a  directory server cannot change passwords  For more information  refer to Creating and  Managing Users Via User Information Source  on page 37      Click Administration on the left menu    Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area   Click Users in the Users  Roles  and Groups area    Enter any part of the user s name into the search field    Click Find    Select the user from the list     Choose from the following options     if You Want To    Edit user information Click Edit User in the left menu of the server  workspace     Edit the user account information     Edit the user ID Edit User ID in the left menu of the server  workspace     Edit the user ID     This option is available only for manually  created users        8  Click Save        34    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Deleting 
310. tion for the LMS     URL Enter the website address of the LMS  For example   http   acme uLearn com     URL Encoding Select the URL encoding format from the drop   down list           136    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 6  Working With the Website       Field  Description   Authentication Required Click the checkbox if you want to require  authentication    Login If authentication is required  enter the login name  associated with the LMS    Password If authentication is required  enter the password  associated with the LMS     Password Confirmation Confirm the password    Track Alerts Select Yes if you want to track alerts for collect   receipt  and update messages to the uPerform server    Active Server Select Yes to enable communication with the LMS   Select No to disable communication with the LMS    E Mail Address Enter the email address where you can receive alert  notifications     7  Click Save        Assigning Projects to an LMS    A Publishing any course from a project to which an LMS is assigned will result in PENS  notifications being sent to all LMSs associated with that project     1  Click Administration on the left menu of the server workspace   2  Click Server Administration in the Administration area    3  Click LMS Settings in the System Administration area    4  Click on the name of the LMS to be assigned to a project     5  Click Assigned Projects in the left menu     Assigned Projects   u360        select or unselect all                 Acme Develop
311. tion value is changed   2  the definition is removed  3  a new definition is added  or 4  the assigned definition context is  changed or removed  or a new context is added to terms that are contained in that document     In addition  uPerform documents are automatically globalized when the documents are checked  into the server     Globalizing a Single Document From the Editor    1  Select OPEN  gt  OPEN FROM ANCILE UPERFORM SERVER      2  Select the document to open    3  Click OK    4  Click the Document tab     5  Select TOOLS  gt  UPDATE TERM DEFINITIONS     Q In this scenario  the document will not display in the globalize history list     Globalizing a Batch of Documents on a Daily Frequency    The uPerform server can be configured to automatically globalize the documents in the globalize  queue daily during off peak hours  Documents are automatically placed in the queue when 1  the  definition value is changed  2  the definition is removed  3  a new definition is added  or 4  the  assigned definition context is changed or removed  or a new context added     For detailed information on creating a daily globalize task  refer to the ANCILE uPerform  Administration user manual     Via the globalize queue  you can also immediately process one or more documents  For complete  details on the globalize queue  refer to Viewing the Globalize Queue and History  on page 185         184    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 9  Working with the Glossary       Viewing the Globalize Qu
312. to Step 4     Perform an advanced search In the top banner  click Advanced Search   Go to Step 2        2  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                                  Terms Enter a word s   wildcard  and or Boolean  operator     Select the content on which you would like to    perform a search  For example  uPerform  document        Location Select the project on which you would like to  perform the search        20    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 3  Exploring the Server Workspace       3  Click Search     4  Review the list of search results and  as desired  click on a result hyperlink to display the  content page     Using Skip Links    Q Skip links are available when a screen reader is being used in conjunction with  uPerform or when you are using keyboard navigation   If you are using a screen reader  skip links are the first objects a screen reader will    recognize  If you are using keyboard navigation  the links will display when you press  the tab key and bring focus to the links     1  Perform one of the following options     If you want to  Skip to the main content  Select Skip to main content when the screen    reader announces it or when the link is focused  after tabbing     Skip to the left menu Select Skip to navigation when the screen  reader announces it or when the link is focused  after tabbing        Using the Left Menu    The left menu area contains both server navigation buttons and a list of options relevant to your  locat
313. to the Phrases field to  search for text     Click OK        10  Select one of the following feedback phrases     Correct Displays when the end user enters the correct  answer     First Attempt Incorrect Displays when the end user enters an incorrect  answer the first time    Second Attempt Incorrect Displays when the end user enters an incorrect  answer the second time     11  Enter a URL in the URL field        Q Based on the player element selected  this option may not display     12  Select the Enabled checkbox next to the video format extension to enable the video format in  published output     13  Select a video format and click Add  Modify  or Delete to make changes to the available  video formats     14  Select FILE  gt  SAVE to save the template     Default Publication Settings  Course  User Interface Settings  1  From the editor  open the new template   2  Click Publications on the status bar     3  Select Course under Default Publication Settings in the task pane        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  255    Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       4  Select Course User Interface Settings from the drop down list     Course Pubkcaten Senne              General Properties Phrases  Publicationz  Styles Block  Sectons Ready Gy Offine    5  Select a skin from the Skins drop down list     Q A preview of the skin selection will display in the Preview window     6  Complete the following fields     Field  Description                 Player Colors Select a background color  course 
314. translated uPerform content using the uPerform client     2  Select FILE  gt  CHECK IN  FILENAME        Q This will open the Check In window and automatically select the appropriate check in  location for the translated file  It will also display all binders in the current project that  do not have a translated document in the current client document s language  You may  check the document into the pre selected location or chose another binder     Choosing another binder is only an option with new content  not with FILE gt SA VE  AS content     3  Click OK        94    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       Adding Translated uPerform Managed Documents    Q The original managed document must already reside in your project     1  Select the desired managed document binder     2  Click Add Translation     Add a New Document    Description     Language    English  United States   en US  X     Select a file    Browse  Free text     B  File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table    2 w     i  ay       Normal v   Verdana v 120t    B    3  Complete the following fields     Fed  Description    Description Enter amplifying information about the  document     Language Select the desired language     The list contains all available  languages that currently do not have  translations        4  Perform one of the following     If You Want To    Select a file  default  Click Browse    to locate and select the managed  document to upload     Click Open     
315. tration in the left navigation pane   2  Select Server Administration   3  Select Integration Settings under Server Administration   4  Select Context Sensitive Help Connection Profiles under Integration Settings   5  Select the connection profile you want to view or edit     6  Perform one of the following options     i You Want To    7T  Review the following fields     Field   Description  Application The application specified for context sensitive help           Applications Help Web This value is generated by uPerform and is not  Agent Profile Setting configurable   Oracle only     ANCILE Solutions  Inc  299       Chapter 13  Setting Up Online Help       Field  Description                  This value is generated by uPerform and is not  configurable  Oracle only     Applications Help Web  Agent Profile Setting for    Authors    This value is generated by uPerform and is not  configurable   Help Launchpad  PeopleSoft  SAP  Portal  Siebel  and Web     SR13 PlainHTML Server This value is generated by uPerform and is not  Name configurable  SAP CRM only   SR13 PlainHTML Server This value is generated by uPerform and is not  Path configurable  SAP CRM only     This option is available only for the Web  application  Select Transaction Code to search by    Search Method    the uPerform transaction code property only  Full  Text  All Words  to search based on properties  or  Full Text  Any Words  to search based on  properties     Width The width of the browser window in which th
316. types of users are available in uPerform  end user  author  and administrator  Within the  administrator designation there is a further subgrouping of administrators     g    m     m        g    System administrator  has administrative access to the entire uPerform instance     Project administrator  has administrative access to one or more projects within the  uPerform instance     Glossary administrator  has administrative access to glossary functionalities     Publishing administrator  has administrative access to publishing functionalities     Roles are used to determine administrator and author access to content within the server  and also  to set up end user access to projects that are published on the website  Groups are an optional  functionality that can be used to restrict content access to a subset of users specified by the  administrator     The end user population can access uPerform content via one of two account types     m     Anonymous  No login to the uPerform website is required  If users access the website  anonymously  they will not have access to personalization options such as  subscriptions and favorites  An anonymous user can request an account  This request  sends a message to the Help Desk folder on the server  The system administrator can  act on this request to create a named account     Named  The system administrator can create a named user account and assign the  user to specific groups and roles within uPerform        30    ANCILE Solutions  I
317. uPerform server via a web browser     2  Click i  lizissiin     3  Click on the name of the project to edit     4  Click Edit Properties on the left menu   Edit General Properties    Name  HR Project Import    Description     a  Add Multiple Languages     gt  project Roles      gt  project Settings     g ANCILE Info Pak Properties section is displayed on the General Properties form   For detailed information on incorporating Info Pak content  refer to Incorporating Info  Pak Content  on page 329      5  Edit the following information     Field  Description  Name Enter the name of the project        Description Enter amplifying information about the project and  its purpose        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  67    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       6  As needed  select one of the following options     If You Want To    Enable multi language support to seta   Click Add Multiple Languages   name and description of the project for  any of the supported languages  This  language specific name and description  will display based on the language  preference set in the user s account     Select a default language from the drop down  list   This language will be displayed if the user s  language is not available      Click Enable   Go to Step 7   Assign users to a role associated with  For detailed instructions on assigning a user to a    the project role  refer to Assigning a User to a Project Role   on page 32      Specify project settings For detailed instructions on ena
318. uage Select your interface language from the drop down list     For an end user account  this will also set the user s language for use in  content filtering of website documents based on language     Email Address Edit your email address           ANCILE Solutions  Inc  13    Chapter 2  Getting Started       4  Click Save     g If you changed your password  you will be prompted to sign into the uPerform server  using your new password        14 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 2  Getting Started          Getting Help on the uPerform Server Workspace  The uPerform server About link provides detailed information regarding the server version  The    uPerform server Help link provides access to online help and the ANCILE Product Support  Center     Viewing uPerform Server Product Information    1  Click About on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Review the following information     Option  Description  Displays the installed version of the uPerform server     Copyright Displays uPerform copyright information     Third Party Information Displays copyright information for third party products included in  ANCILE uPerform        Accessing Help for the Server  1  Click Help on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Select a help document hyperlink to display help     Accessing the Product Support Center  1  Click Help on the left menu of the server workspace     2  Click ANCILE uPerform Support to access the ANCILE Product Support Center        ANCILE Solutions  In
319. ublication Settings in the task pane        ode Gad Pith Sat         4  Complete review the following fields     Field  Description                 Mirror Margins Select Mirror Margins to create booklet style   double sided pages for output     Select Publish Table of Contents to create a table  of contents for output     Table of Contents    Select Display section titles in the table of  contents to display the section titles in inserted  uPerform content in the published output     Select Display course cover pages to display the  course cover page in published output     Select the unit of measurement and specify the  margins for the top  bottom  left  and right pages        Select size and unit of measurement   5  Choose from the following options     If You Want To  Copy a style Select the style you want to copy  and click Add      Delete a style Select the style you want to delete  and click Delete     Move the style earlier in the  list    Move the style later in the list    Click Move Up one or more times as needed to  determine where the style will display in the table of  contents     Click Move Down one or more times as needed to  determine where the style will display in the table of  contents        6  Click Select Phrase to select a phrase for the player        246    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       7  Perform one of the following options     if You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add   Select a language from the left   En
320. ument    Course Footer The block that contains the course footer  information    Course Header The block that contains the course header  information    Exercise Data Sheet The block that contains information relevant to the  end user s task     Nu    The block that contains the note boilerplate text     S  e  e  Note  Pur The block that contains the trigger  prerequisites   menu path  transaction code  and helpful hints   The block that contains the percent complete   The block that contains the screen flow image file   Start the task using the menu   The block the contains the start transaction text   path  The block that contains the step boilerplate text   Student Guide Footer The block that contains the student guide footer  information   Student Guide Header The block that contains the student guide header  information   The block that contains the substep boilerplate text   Test Information The block that contains the test history and  scenarios   Test Scenarios The block that contains the table specific to test  scenarios     6  Click Modify     AP BPP  oter  ader  ading  pose  sult   step       7  Click Select Phrase        274 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 11  Using Author Templates       8  Perform one of the following options     If You Want To    Add a custom phrase Click Add     Select a language from the left     Enter the text in the Content area   Click OK    Select a phrase Select a language from the Language drop down  list     Select a phrase from the 
321. use of the central glossary and rich text in definitions  use the  glossary queue and glossary history list  manage glossary terms and definitions  run  imports and exports  and subscribe to glossary events     uPerform Publishing Administrators  Members of the publishing administrator role  can enable and disable publishing conversion types for managed documents  use the  publish queue and publish history list  and subscribe to publish events     uPerform System Administrators  Members of the system administrators role are  automatically added to both the glossary and publishing administrators roles    However  these members are not automatically removed from these roles if they are  removed from the system administrators role   Refer to the ANCILE uPerform  Administration manual for details on using the system administrator role     You cannot create or delete an instance wide server role  However  you can modify a role to add  or remove users  Only administrators can modify roles        52    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapier 4  Managing Users  Roles  and Groups       Assigning a User to the uPerform System  Glossary  or Publishing Administrator  Roles    1  Click Administration on the left menu   2  Click Users  Roles  and Groups in the Administration area     3  Click uPerform Roles in the Users  Roles  and Groups area     4  Perform one of the following actions     Field              jDescipion o Z          Add a user to the uPerform Click on uPerform System Administrat
322. venti uud eun deba e redeo topi a ede tellu ntes bodas 134  Publishing  Courses to an LMS ne se fete useless e ee eed 135  Viewing the End User WeDSslte stie etat opti bee tecl ete ae acceda altus odt le i tetes 139  Configuring and Customizing the Website                 essere 141   Chapter 7  Using Workflow                                  eee ee eee e rer eeee esee enun nnn 143  Introd  cti  n COW Jod oiv CM TEN 144  Creating and Starting a Workflow iine Uaec ose ie vd dais iiMa Ray canteens 145  Using Workflow Notifications iue pia ee ieee dei een eee cu eas 147  U  pdating a Workflow c            M    M 148  Participating ma WOEETION Loses aote ete fe i a e CH Rie x VP ba eod Nuts 149  Stopping a Workflow and Deleting a Workflow                     eese 151       ANCILE Solutions  Inc        Viewing Workflow HIStory eL                                                153  Chapter 8  Collaborating on Content                                          usus  155  Introduction to Collaboration             inue tota tee ecient e Ped Ee Eva dev dedi 156  Viewing BICIS PIENE V             c 157  Using  Discussion Entries oae rodeo ipia ve vedi tun ae hard Ee UL ee 158  Using Subscriptions Within a Discussion                  eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneen nennen nennen nenne 160  Managing  DISCUSSIODS esen i uite de a fondu tessuti cdibu itera a E deas 162  Using the Tell Others Feature  esee ver m e reas S Ue ENS PXRUS TASSE R S e eR P ee eR ONE Un PUR Pe aeiia 163  Chapter 9  Working wit
323. version 5 51 or higher is  installed     You have a login to the uPerform server  the server is currently operational  the server  is accessible from your computer and a blank project exists on the uPerform server   You must have administrator rights to the project    You have a template assigned to your blank project    You have initialized Info Pak and set your working directory    You have noted the location of your Info Pak parent and content folders    You have noted the location of the Web Architect and Glossary profiles    You have launched the uPerform client    You have noted the location of the Info Pak template profile     All instances of Microsoft Word are closed     Create an ipcontent folder in the  Install Location  collaboration www  location   and place your Info Pak content into this folder        334    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Activities During Web Architect Processing    During migration of Info Pak   Web Architect data  the Migration Wizard gathers document data   The Migration Wizard uses the Web Architect category data and hierarchy information to  establish the uPerform document library and website folder structure  The Migration Wizard  generates a link to the child output in the same order as the published link priority in Web  Architect  This link is activated once the uPerform content verification is run     Within the uPerform document library  placeholders are created for parent documents  These
324. website  you must change the website context  for the content  For detailed information on website context  refer to Assigning a  Context to Content     1  Click Q2siesss in the uPerform server workspace    2  Click on the project name    3  Click Document Library or Website    4  Navigate to the folder containing the content to be moved   5  Click Move on the left menu    6  Select the checkbox to the left of the folder or content name   7T  Click OK    8  Navigate to the new location     9  Click Paste Here on the left menu        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  91    Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library       10  Select the checkbox to the left of the new location name     11  Click OK        92 ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Managing Translations and Related Content    In uPerform  translated content is linked to other content via a binder  A binder contains the  original document and all subsequent translations  Translated content may be either uPerform  content or managed documents  Translated uPerform content may be linked to other uPerform  content via a Save As operation or by creating new content in another language     For example  your US team may have content that must be slightly modified to reflect the  business process in your UK office  You can save the US content to create translated UK content  and then incorporate the process and language edits required  In addition  another author can  create new French cont
325. wing default locations  In Windows  XP  C  Documents and Settings  username  VApplication Data ANCILE Migration  Wizard Version X X Logs Glossary and in Windows Vista and Windows 7   C  Users App Data Roaming Migration Wizard Wersion X X Logs Glossary        ANCILE Solutions  Inc  335    Appendix A  Incorporating Info Pak Content       Activities During Document Check In Processing    9    The check in progress uses Microsoft Word to automatically check for and upgrade  Info Pak documents to version 5 51  Microsoft Word should not be used until the  upgrade process is complete     The following Info Pak document types can be migrated to uPerform  parent  simulation  an  assimilated Microsoft PowerPoint file  an assimilated Microsoft Excel file  an assimilated  Microsoft Word file  an assimilated Microsoft Visio file  and an assimilated HTML file  Content  is processed in the following manner     CJ All simulation files   ssf  are zipped prior to check in  The zipped file extension is   zsd     CJ Assimilated HTML documents and all accompanying files are zipped prior to check  in  The extension of the zipped assimilated HTML file is  zhd     O Assimilated Microsoft Office content is checked in as is without zipping prior        CJ Info Pak parent documents are zipped prior to check in  The extension of the zip file  is  zid     All Microsoft Office documents in the specified parent folder are checked for an Info Pak GUID   Any documents without an Info Pak GUID will not be che
326. with legacy Info Pak documents  refer to Incorporating Info Pak Content  on page 329      Click OK        102    ANCILE Solutions  Inc     Chapter 5  Working With the Document Library          Retention Period    uPerform allows system or project administrators to ensure the website content is current by  setting project or system level retention policies  Once you have published a document  the  project retention policy will begin to track that document  including uPerform documents   managed documents  and Info Pak documents   The only documents not covered by retention  periods are Student Guides  uPerform course packages  and web documents  Once the document  has reached the implemented number of days  the uPerform server can perform one of the  following     O Remove published content from the web server        O Send a notification to the author that the content is expired   Administrators can change the periodicity and policies for each retention policy   There are many reasons to implement a retention policy    O Ensure accuracy of the project documentation    O Comply with legal requirements       CJ Meet business goals regarding return on investment    Adding a Retention Policy  1  Click  sissis  in the uPerform server workspace   2  Click on the project name     3  Click Retention Period     Edit Retention Period Settings    Enable retention periods for this project    Number of days content is valid     Retention Actions to Perform     Remove Published Content    
327. y was introduced in EP6 SP17 and EP7 SP10 as a simple way to  direct end users to the correct help URL  however  if you wish to configure the help URL for  iViews or portal pages for which the URL to Help Topic property is not available  you may do so  by using the PCD Inspector  The procedure for determining which procedure to use for setting the  help URL depends on the following criteria     O The version and service pack  SP  of your SAP EP system       O Whether you wish to enable the Help option on an iView or portal page    SAP EP Service Pack Set Help URL for iViews      Set Help URL for  Version  SP  Version via Portal Pages via  Prior to SP17 PCD Inspector PCD Inspector  SP 17 20 Portal Content Administrator PCD Inspector    SP 10 12 Portal Content Administrator PCD Inspector    SP 13 Portal Content Administrator Portal Content  Administrator    Prior to SP 10 PCD Inspector PCD Inspector       Setting the Help URL Using Portal Content Administration    If you are setting the URL to Help Topic property for an iView portal page  you may do so using  Portal Content Administration     To set an iView portal page URL to Help Topic property using Portal Content Administration   1  Log into SAP Enterprise Portal with Content Administrator permission     2  Inthe Portal Catalog  right click on the desired iView portal page and select OPEN    OBJECT     Q An iView or portal page may display in several different contexts based on role within  the SAP EP  For example  the  Cre
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Zünd Cut Center - Caldera Support Server  1 EO64 60cm Fan-Forced Oven User Manual  - Americantec Automação Comercial  Single Anchor Fall Arrestor Connector Subsystems (FACSS)  Para la obturación instantánea de vías de agua. Para  MAXIMUS VII HERO v1.0  GRID superscalar User`s Manual Version 1.5.0 - People    Philips SCF860/23 blender  Manual de instrucciones - SOLO Kleinmotoren GmbH    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file